Thermal Stress Relief in Storage Tank (API-650)

Thermal Stress Relief in Storage Tank API-650
١
٢
‫‪Thermal Stress Relief in Storage Tank API-650‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻔﺘﺎر ‪6 .....................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺼﻞ اول‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪10 ......................... API 650‬‬
‫‪ -1,1‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪١٠ ................................................. THERMAL STRESS RELIEF : (5.7.4‬‬
‫‪ -1,2‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.1‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪١٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪١٠ ............................................... FLUSH-TYPE CLEANOUT FITTINGS‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪١١ .............................................. FLUSH-TYPE CLEANOUT FITTINGS‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ از ‪١٢ ..................................... FLUSH-TYPE CLEANOUT FITTINGS‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪ FLUSH-TYPE SHELL CONNECTION‬در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪١٩ ............................ 5.14‬‬
‫‪ -1,3‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.2‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ در ﻣﻮاد ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ III, II, I‬و ﻳﺎ ‪٢٠ ............... IIIA‬‬
‫‪ -1,4‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.3‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ در ﻣﻮاد ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ V, IVA, IV‬و ‪٢١ ................ VI‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪٢٢ .................................................................................INSERT PLATE‬‬
‫‪ -1,5‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ FLUSH-TYPE‬ﻫﺎ ‪٢۴ .............................‬‬
‫‪ -1,6‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.5‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮاد ﻛﻮﺋﻴﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ‪٢٧ ......................... ...‬‬
‫‪ -1,7‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.6‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪٢٧ .........................................................‬‬
‫‪ -1,8‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.7 & 5.7.4.8‬آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎت و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎي ‪٣٠ ........................... PWHT‬‬
‫‪ -1,9‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.9‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه ‪٣١ .................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺟﺮاء ‪34 ...............................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,1‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن ‪٣۴ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,2‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ اﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺣﺎوي ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ‪٣۴ ...........................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,3‬ﭼﺎرت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ‪٣۵ ............................................... NACE-SP0403‬‬
‫‪ -2,4‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن داراي ‪٣۶ ............................................ CONCRETE RING WALL‬‬
‫‪ -2,5‬روش اول "اﻟﻒ"‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﺪا از ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪۴٢ ................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,6‬روش اول "ب"‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﺪا از ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪۴٨ ................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,7‬روش دوم‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪۴٩ ................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,8‬ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ روش دوم ‪۴٩ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,9‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ اول؛ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن و ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ‪۴٩ ............................. ANCHOR BOLTS‬‬
‫‪ -2,10‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (ANCHOR BOLTS‬در ﻣﺨﺰن ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ‪۵٣ ...........................‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ -2,11‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ دوم؛ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪۵٧ .................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,12‬اﺟﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪۵٧ ....................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪۵٧ ...........................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ‪۶٠ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ‪۶١ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز و روش ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ ‪۶١ ..............................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ ‪۶١ ..................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ﻛﻠﻲ اول ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ‪۶١ .............................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮل دوم ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪۶١ .........................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ‪۶٢ ......................................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ ‪۶٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻗﺒﻞ از راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ ‪۶۴ ........................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ و ﻛﺮوي ﺑﻪ روش ‪۶۶ ..................... INTERNAL FIRING‬‬
‫‪ -2,13‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن‪٧١ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,14‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪٧١ ......................(STATIONARY FURNACE‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ )ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ(‪٧١ ...................................................................‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪٧١ .......................................... (STATIONARY FURNACE‬‬
‫‪ -2,15‬ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ دﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻗﺮار دادن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت در آن ‪٧٢ ..................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,16‬ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪٧٣ .............................. (STATIONARY FURNACE‬‬
‫‪ -2,17‬ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ درون ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪٧۶ ...... (STATIONARY FURNACE‬‬
‫‪ -2,18‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪٨٠ ................................. TEMPERATURE CONTROL‬‬
‫‪ -2,19‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎز ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎي ‪ TELLTALE HOLE‬در ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪٨۵ ......................‬‬
‫‪ -2,20‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه‪٨۶ .....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,21‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٧ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ‪٨٩ ................................................................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ‪٨٩ ............................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,22‬ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز ‪ PUTTY‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۵ ................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,23‬ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪٩۶ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,24‬ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪١٠٢ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪١٠۶ ................................................................HEATING RATE‬‬
‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪١٠۶ ................................................................HOLDING TIME‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪١٠٧................................................................ COOLING RATE‬‬

‫■ ‪ -‬ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮد ‪١٠٧.......................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ‪ PWHT‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪١٠٩...............................‬‬
‫‪ -2,25‬ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ )‪١١١........................................ (TEMPORARY FURNACE‬‬
‫‪ -2,26‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪١١٣..................................................................‬‬
‫■ ‪-‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ FLUSH-TYPE‬ﻫﺎ ‪١٢۴..............................‬‬
‫‪ -2,27‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ‪١٢۶..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2,28‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪١٣٠...................................................‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‪133 .............................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اول‪ :‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ"اﻟﺤﺪاده" ‪١٣۴................................‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ دوم‪ :‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‪١۴٢.............................. TK1001A‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮم‪ :‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‪١۵٨................................ TK3001‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎرم‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪170 ......................................................................‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﺪاﻳﺘﮕﺮان ﺟﻬﺎن ‪١٧١......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش‪٢١١......................................................................................:‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﻛﺎر اُﻛﺴﻴﻦ ‪٢١۵.......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺎن ﺟﻨﻮب ‪٢٢١.....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (STATIONARY FURNACE‬دارﻧﺪ ‪٢٢۵.............................‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺴﺎز در اﻫﻮاز ‪٢٢۵.......................................................................................‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺎﺷﺎ در اﻫﻮاز ‪٢٢٧........................................................................‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي اراك ‪٢٢٨...................................................................................‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﮔﺮوه ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ اﻧﺼﺎر ‪٢٣٠.............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪232 .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻔﺘﺎر‬
‫»ﺻﻠﻮات ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ و آل ﻣﺤﻤﺪ« ﺳﺮّ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮي ﻧﻮر‬

‫*****‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﺤﺚ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎي اﻧﺪازه و وزن ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه )‪ (Storage Tanks‬ﺑﻌﻀﺎً دارﻧﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ در‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ و ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎي ﻧﻔﺖ و ﮔﺎز اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ زﻳﺮ ﮔﻮاه اﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮاﺣﺖ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 620‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.25.2‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﭘﺲ از ﻧﺼﺐ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪،‬‬
‫زﻳﺮا اﻧﺪازه و وزن آن اﺟﺎزه ﺳﺎﭘﻮرت ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در دﻣﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻨﺶ را ﻧﻤﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟ در اداﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﭼﻨﻴﻦ آﻣﺪه‪:‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ ،‬روش ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎت ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰان رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ اﺛﺒﺎت ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬
‫ب( ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه را ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻻﻳﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ در ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺎور ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ رﺳﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 6.19‬و ‪( H.4‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ واژه ‪ Peening‬ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 6.19‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 6.19‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زدن )ﺑﺎ ﭼﻜﺶ( روي ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 6.19.1‬ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ اﻳﻦ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻮن ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺰرگ اﺳﺖ و ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧﺮا‬
‫در ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ و ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻛﺮد ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ و در‬
‫آﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ روش ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺧﺎص ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.25‬داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زدن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ‪ I‬ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬در‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎي ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 6.19.2‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زدن )ﺑﺎ ﭼﻜﺶ( روي ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ و در‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.25‬اﺟﺒﺎري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ آﻧﺮا ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ داﻧﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زدن )ﺑﺎ ﭼﻜﺶ( روي ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﻜﺶ ﺑﺎدي‪ ،‬ﭼﻜﺶ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻲ اﺗﻔﺎق ﺑﻴﻮﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﺎت روي ﭘﺎس رﻳﺸﻪ و ﭘﺎس ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ وارد ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫در ﻫﻤﻴﻦ اﺑﺘﺪا از دوﺳﺘﺎن ارﺟﻤﻨﺪم آﻗﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﺎن ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻮﺷﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻤﻴﺪ رﺿﺎ ﻣﺮآﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮا در ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و‬
‫اﺻﻼح اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻳﺎري ﻛﺮدﻧﺪ ﻛﻤﺎل ﺗﺸﻜﺮ را دارم و ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ از راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎ و ﻫﻤﻜﺎري اﻳﺸﺎن در اراﺋﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻗﺪرداﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﻼش ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺎس ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ در اﻳﻦ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ اراﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ وﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻮاﻗﺼﻲ دﻳﺪه ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻟﺬا از ﺗﻤﺎم دوﺳﺘﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺸﻤﻨﺪم ﻣﺎ را در رﻓﻊ ﻧﻮاﻗﺺ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻳﺎري ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫از دوﺳﺘﺎن ﺑﺰرﮔﻮارم آﻗﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺷﻴﺮواﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﻴﻦ اﻳﺮاﻧﭙﻮر‪ ،‬راﻣﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﭘﻮر ﺷﺮﻳﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﮋﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻣﻬﺪوي ﻫﻔﺸﺠﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮوﻳﺰ ﺻﺎﺑﺮﭘﻮر‪ ،‬ﭘﮋﻣﺎن ﻧﺎﺻﺮي و ﺳﻴﺪ ﻫﺎدي ﻛﻠﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮا در ﻧﮕﺎرش اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎب ﻳﺎري ﻛﺮدﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺳﭙﺎﺳﮕﺰارم‪ .‬ان ﺷﺎء اﷲ ﻛﻪ در ﺛﻮاب ﻧﺸﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﺳﻬﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻋﻜﺲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Arbab_Taghavi@yahoo.com‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ آرزوي ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮوران ﻋﺰﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮادر ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﭼﻬﺮﺗﻘﻮي‬
‫‪ / 30‬آذر ﻣﺎه ‪1400 /‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در ﭘﻨﺞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺼﻞ اول‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪API 650‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺟﺮاء‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎرم‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺠﺮي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺼﻞ اول‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪API 650‬‬
‫‪ -1,1‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪Thermal Stress Relief : (5.7.4‬‬
‫‪ -1,2‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.1‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (Thermal Stress Relief) : (5.7.4.1‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬

‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ - 5.7.4.1‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﻓﻴﺘﻴﻨﮕﻬﺎي )‪ (Flush-type cleanout‬و )‪(Flush-type shell connections‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ و ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ در ﺑﺪﻧﻪي ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﺬﻛﻮر در ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﺪودهي درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت )‪) 600 ºC - 650 ºC (1100 ºF -1200 ºF‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﻛﻮﺋﻴﻨﭻ‬
‫و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.7.4.5‬ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ازاء ﻫﺮ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره‬
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻛﻒ )ﻳﺎ رﻳﻨﮓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻛﻒ ﻳﺎ ‪ ( Annular‬و ﺟﻮش‬
‫ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪Flush-type Cleanout Fittings‬‬
‫در ﻫﻤﻴﻦ اﺑﺘﺪا اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮال ﻣﻄﺮح ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Flush-type Cleanout Fittings‬و‬
‫‪ Flush-type shell connections‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮال ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻳﻨﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪A flush type cleanout fitting is a manway, for personnel or maintenance‬‬
‫‪access and according 5.7.7.9 The dimensions and details of the cleanout-opening‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
assemblies covered by this section are based on internal hydrostatic loading with
no external-piping loading . A flush type shell connection is a nozzle intended
for piping connections and anticipates additional loads from the attached
piping.
‫ ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬manway ‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﭘﺎﻛﺴﺎزي ﻧﻮع ﻓﻼش از ﻧﻮع‬
‫ اﺑﻌﺎد و ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎزﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﻛﺴﺎزي ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ‬5.7.7.9 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫اﺳﺎس ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺪون ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
Flush-Type Cleanout Fittings ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از‬-*
11
Flush-type Cleanout Fittings ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ از‬-*
١٢
13
‫در ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ در آن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺜﻞ )ﻧﻔﺖ ﺧﺎم( ﭘﺲ از ﻣﺪﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ از ﻣﻮاد رﺳﻮب ﺷﺪه در ﻛﻒ ﻣﺨﺰن اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ وﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ اﻳﻦ‬
‫رﺳﻮﺑﺎت ﻣﻀﺮ از ﻛﻒ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﻤﻊ آوري و ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻒ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻢ ﺑﺼﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ و‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از رﺑﺎت ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮﻧﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺼﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ در ﻣﺨﺰن‪:‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
15
١٦
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از رﺑﺎت ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺨﺰن‪:‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
١٨
‫اﻣﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ از ﻧﻮع ﻓﻼش ‪ ، Flush-type shell connections‬ﻧﺎزﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ‬
‫در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪ Flush-type Shell Connection‬در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪5.14‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
IIIA ‫ و ﻳﺎ‬III, II, I ‫ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ در ﻣﻮاد ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي‬: (5.7.4.2) ‫ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬-1,3
٢٠
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.2‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻬﻮﻟﻬﺎ و ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻧﻮع ‪ flush-type‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬وﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل‬

‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ از ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ III, II, I‬و ﻳﺎ ‪ IIIA‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ ‪ 12 in.‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺪﻧﻪي ﻳﺎ در ورق‬
‫‪) Thickened insert plate‬ورق ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي ورق ﺑﺪﻧﻪ و ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد( ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ورق ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ورق ‪ Thickened insert plate‬ﻧﺼﺐ و‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪي ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻣﺤﺪودهي درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ‪600-650ºC‬‬
‫)‪ (1100 °F to 1200 °F‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ازاء ﻫﺮ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ III, II, I‬و ‪ IIIA‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪول ‪( Table 4.4b‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع از ﻳﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ‪ Table 4.4b‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪي ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ آﻣﺎده ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1,4‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.3‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ در ﻣﻮاد ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ V, IVA, IV‬و ‪VI‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.3‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻬﻮﻟﻬﺎ و ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻧﻮع ‪ flush-type‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬وﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل‬

‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ از ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ V ، IVA ، IV‬ﻳﺎ ‪ VI‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ از ‪ 2 in.‬ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ در‬
‫ورق ‪) Thickened insert plate‬ورق ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي ورق ﺑﺪﻧﻪ و ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد( ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 13‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ورق ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ورق ‪ Thickened insert plate‬ﻧﺼﺐ و‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪي ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻣﺤﺪودهي درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ‪600-650ºC‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫)‪ (1100 °F to 1200 °F‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ازاء ﻫﺮ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ از ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪Insert plate‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪Thickened insert plate‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
.‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ و ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ‬Thickened Insert Plate ‫ در واﻗﻊ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ورق‬:‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
23
‫)ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ V, IVA, IV‬و ‪ VI‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪول ‪( Table 4.4b‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ‪Table 4.4b‬‬
‫‪ -1,5‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ Flush-type‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻬﻮﻟﻬﺎ و ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮع ‪ flush-type‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در‬
‫ﻣﻮرد ﺟﻮش ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ورق ﺟﺎ داده ﺷﺪه )در ورق ﺑﺪﻧﻪ( ﻳﺎ ورق ﺟﺎ داده ﺷﺪه ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ورق ﻛﻒ اﻧﻮﻻر‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ (Annular‬اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼوه ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎز ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎي ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﺎزل و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﻮل ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮآورده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ – (a‬ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎي ﺧﺎرج از ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ )ورﻗﻬﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ( )ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫‪ 5.7.2.4‬ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ – (b‬اﺑﻌﺎد ﮔﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺟﻮش ‪ Fillet‬در ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﻮع ‪ Slip-on‬از ‪ 16 mm‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺟﻮش ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺐ‬
‫)‪ (Butt‬در ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﮔﺮدن ﺟﻮش )‪ (Welding neck‬از ‪ 19 mm‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل در ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ )‪ 90 ºC (200 ºF‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﺷﻮد ﻣﺤﺪودهي ‪ 16 mm‬و ‪ 19 mm‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 32 mm‬و ‪ 40 mm‬اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم در زﻣﺎن ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﺆﺛﺮي در ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪن‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﭘﺴﻤﺎﻧﺪ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻋﻮﺟﺎج در ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري دارد‪ .‬در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ اﻋﻤﺎل ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم در زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‪ ،‬ﺣﺪود ﻣﻌﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﻮش ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ دو ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ اﻟﺰام ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﺎل داﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻓﺎرغ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ در ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪود ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و اﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺎ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري درﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫روش اﻧﺠﺎم ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ از روﺷﻬﺎي اﻧﺠﺎم و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﭻ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ Tempil Stick‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﭽﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1,6‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.5‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮاد ﻛﻮﺋﻴﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.5‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ )ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ( در ﻣﻮاد ﻛﻮﺋﻴﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ﺷﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از دﻣﺎي ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1,7‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.6‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.6‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ ﻃﺮح رﻳﺰي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ - (a‬در زﻣﺎن ﻗﺮار دادن ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻛﻮره ‪ ،‬دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫)‪ 800‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – (b‬از دﻣﺎي ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 800‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮخ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 220‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 400‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ )ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ اﻳﻨﭻ( ‪ ،‬از ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫)‪ (Wall‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﮔﺮم ﮔﺮدد‪ ،‬ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻣﺎ در ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 220‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 400‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺮاي اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ از واژه ‪ Shell‬و در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫دﻳﻮاره ﺗﺎﻧﻚ اﺷﺎره ﻛﻨﺪ از واژه ‪ wall plate‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‪ .‬در واﻗﻊ ‪ Wall‬ﻳﺎ دﻳﻮاره ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ورق ‪ Thickened Insert Plate‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﻼوه ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬آﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻼك اﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ در دﻳﻮاره اﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﻟﺰوﻣﺎً ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ .shell‬در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻫﻢ از ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ wall plate‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮده ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ آن )ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ - (c‬در ﺧﻼل دوره ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Heating‬دﻣﺎ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 15) 4,6‬ﻓﻮت( ﻣﺘﺮي از ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از )‪ 140 °C (250 °F‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﻣﺪت دﻣﺎي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫)‪ ، (Holding temperature‬ﺑﻴﺶ از )‪ 85 °C (150 °F‬در ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻼف داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت )‪) 595 °C (1100 °F‬ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪5.7.4.8‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎز داﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ (.‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ازاي ﻫﺮ اﻳﻨﭻ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ )ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت دﻳﻮاره ﻣﺨﺰن ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد( ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬در ﻃﻮل دوره ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ (Heating‬و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫)‪ ، (Holding‬ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎده ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار دارد ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻛﺮﺑﻦ اﺳﺘﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎد در ﺻﻨﻌﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪم‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﻌﻠﻬﺎي درون ﻳﻚ ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در ﻛﻮره ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ آﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از اﻳﻦ روﻳﺪاد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن و ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﺸﻌﻠﻬﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻮره ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا در ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﺎً اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر و ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ آن را ﺑﺪﻧﺒﺎل دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ - (d‬در دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 800‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ‪ ،‬ﺧﻨﻚ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻛﻮره ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫ﮔﺮدد ﻳﺎ در ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪن ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪280‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 500‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ اﻳﻨﭻ ‪ ،‬از ورﻗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ در ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 280‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 500‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( در‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در دﻣﺎي زﻳﺮ ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 800‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮاد در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪ -1,8‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.7 & 5.7.4.8‬آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎت و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎي ‪PWHT‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.7‬آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاﻓﻬﺎي ‪ 7.2.3.7‬و‬
‫‪ 7.2.3.8‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.8‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دﻣﺎي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫)‪ 1100‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻏﻴﺮﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در دﻣﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺟﻮش در دﻣﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‪/‬زﻣﺎن ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﭼﻘﺮﻣﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل و ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﭘﺴﻤﺎﻧﺪ را ﻣﻌﺎدل ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﺮآورده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ در آن‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬زﻣﺎن ﻛﻮﺗﺎه اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻮرژﻳﺴﺖ آﮔﺎه و ﺧﺒﺮه و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻮﭘﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﺖ ورﻗﻬﺎي ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار در ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ 23‬از ‪ Data Sheet‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ‪ -1‬ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﺟﺪول ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري دﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ روش‬
‫‪ interpolation‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ‪ -2‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در اﻳﻦ دﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ‪ A537‬ﻛﻼس ‪ 2‬ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺳﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل در ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪول ﻓﻮق‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :1-‬ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در دﻣﺎي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻗﺮار ﺑﻮد ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ 510‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ در دﻣﺎي ‪ 510‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :2-‬ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در دﻣﺎي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻗﺮار ﺑﻮد ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪480‬‬
‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ 20‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ در دﻣﺎي ‪ 480‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :3-‬اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ‪ 580‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪدي ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 600‬و ‪ 570‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس روش ‪ interpolation‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ زﻣﺎن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري در آن دﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﭼﻬﻞ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1,9‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.9‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.9‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ )ﻗﻄﻌﺎت( ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه در ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﺋﻴﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ﺷﺪهي ‪ ، A537, CL 2‬و ﻓﻮﻻد ‪ TMCP A841‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻤﺎن روش ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ )ﻗﻄﻌﺎت( ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬در ﻣﻮرد ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي ‪ TMCP‬ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﻮد‪ .‬زﻳﺮا در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪API 650‬‬
‫از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺮﺗﺐ اﺷﺎره ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬در ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ 5.7.4.5‬دﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﺟﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﻳﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ را در دﻣﺎﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از دﻣﺎي ﺗﻤﭙﺮﻳﻨﮓ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﺪاﻧﺴﺖ‪ .‬از ﺳﻮي دﻳﮕﺮ در ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ‪ 2‬ذﻳﻞ ﺟﺪول ‪ 5.7.4.8‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﺟﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮاد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺗﺮ را‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ‪ A537 Cl2‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻮﻳﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻧﻤﻲ داﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ رﻧﺞ‬
‫دﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻛﻮﻳﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ﺷﺪه را ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪود ﻣﺸﺨﺺ و ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻮرژي اﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺧﺎرج از آن ﺣﺪود ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮاص ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬارد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮات ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در اﺛﺮ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در اﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ دﻓﻌﺎت‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻫﻢ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ 5.7.4.9‬اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ در ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪه ازﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﻳﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ‪ TMCP‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﻟﺰوﻣﺎً ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اول‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ روي آن اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﻮاص ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ در ﺣﺪود ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﻗﺮار داﺷﺖ آﻧﮕﺎه ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺮا روي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫اﺻﻠﻲ واﺟﺪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‪ .‬در واﻗﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪ Procedure Qualification‬را ﻻزم ﻣﻲ داﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﺮ ﻓﻮق در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي )‪: TMCP (Thermo-Mechanical-Control-Process‬‬

‫■ ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي )ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪-‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‪-‬ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ( ‪ TMCP‬ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي داﻧﻪ رﻳﺰ ﺑﺎ وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻗﺪرت ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﺬﻳﺮي‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺑﺎﻻ در ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎرﻫﺎي ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫■ ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي )ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪-‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‪-‬ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ( ‪ TMCP‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﻮﻻد ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺧﺎﻟﺺ )ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ‪ S‬و ﻓﺴﻔﺮ ‪ P‬ﻛﻢ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ آزاد ﻫﻢ ﻛﻢ(‬
‫■‪ -‬ﺣﺎوي ﻛﻤﻲ از ﻣﻴﻜﺮو‪ -‬آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪي در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ذوب ‪ ،‬رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﮔﺮي ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮرد و ﺧﻨﻚ ﺳﺎزي ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫■ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي‪TMCP‬‬

‫■‪ -‬ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺎدل )‪ (CE‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻋﺪم ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫■‪ -‬ﭘﺲ از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ آزاد ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي )ﺟﻮش( )‪(HAZ‬‬
‫■‪ -‬اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭼﻘﺮﻣﮕﻲ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي )ﺟﻮش( )‪(HAZ‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺮك ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮد در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي )ﺟﻮش( )‪(HAZ‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺟﺮاء‬

‫‪ -2,1‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن‬
‫در ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎي ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺎل ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل؛ ﻳﻜﻲ از اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﻴﺎل ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺎزن‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮاد ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ‪ Caustic‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪NACE SP0403 -2015 (RP0403) Avoiding Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking of‬‬
‫‪Carbon Steel Refinery Equipment and Piping‬‬
‫اﻟﺰام ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ دو ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE SP0403‬ﺑﻴﺎن‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ‪ Caustic‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻏﻠﻈﺖ )‪ (NaOH‬و دﻳﮕﺮي دﻣﺎي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ Caustic‬اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزن را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,2‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ اﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺣﺎوي ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE SP0403‬ﺟﺪوﻟﻲ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺳﺎل ‪ 2015‬اﻳﻦ ﺟﺪول ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ A, B, C & D‬ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Area “A”:- Carbon steel no stress relief necessary.‬‬
‫‪Stress relieve welded steam – traced Lines‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪي )”‪ : (“A‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ اﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺎر ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎي ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬درﺻﺪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ 20%‬و دﻣﺎي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ‪40 ºC‬‬
‫‪Area “B”:- Carbon steel Stress relieve Welds and Bends‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪي )”‪ : (“B‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ و ﺧﻤﻜﺎري ﻫﺎي ﻓﻮﻻد ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Area “C”:- Application of Nickel alloys to be Considered in this area Nickel alloy‬‬
‫”‪Trim for Valves in area “B” & “C‬‬
‫‪Trim for Valves: Valve trim parts such as Body, Bonnet, Disk/wedge, Seat, Steam, Gland‬‬
‫‪Packing / Stud & Bolt / Gasket / Hand wheel are all manufactured independently and‬‬
‫‪assembled in valve factory.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪي )”‪ : (“C‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮدن ﻣﻮاد آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬وﻟﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫”‪ “B‬و ”‪ “C‬ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ از ﻣﻮاد آﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﻜﻠﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Area “D”:- 2.3.1.1 The majority of users do not require PWHT on CS if the‬‬
‫‪caustic concentration is less than 2 wt%, regardless of temperature, and‬‬
‫‪some users use 5 wt% as their threshold, as shown in area “D” of the‬‬
‫‪Caustic Service Chart.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪي )”‪ : (“D‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ ، 2.3.1.1‬اﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﺑﺪون در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ دﻣﺎ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ‪ ٪2‬وزﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ در ﻣﻮاد ﻛﺮﺑﻦ اﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ CS‬ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ‪ PWHT‬ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ و ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪ ٪5‬وزﻧﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان آﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﭼﺎرت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ "‪"D‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬درﺻﺪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ 1.5%‬و دﻣﺎي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ‪Any temperature‬‬
‫‪ -2,3‬ﭼﺎرت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ‪NACE-SP0403‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ داراي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ اﺳﺖ زده ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ اﺟﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬در اﺑﺘﺪا ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن‪:‬‬
‫‪ -2,4‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن داراي ‪Concrete Ring Wall‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺟﺪاره ﻧﺎزك ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ دﻳﻮارﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اي ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪ (Concrete Ring Walls‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﻮارﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اي ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﮕﺮد ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اي در‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (Anchor bolts‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺎﺧﺖ در دﻳﻮاره‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻗﺮار داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪) .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد‪(.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎي داﺧﻞ دﻳﻮاره ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اي ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪ (Concrete Ring Walls‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮاﻧﻮل ﻓﺸﺮده ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد و ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺮده ﻣﺨﺰن و ﺑﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ) ﻓﻀﺎي داﺧﻞ دﻳﻮاره ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اي( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬
‫ﻣﻮادي ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪازه و درﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮاﻛﻢ ﺷﻮد و از وﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي زﻫﻜﺸﻲ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي دﻳﻮاره ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.8.11.3‬از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪:API 650-2020‬‬

‫… ‪NOTE Tanks that rest directly on a foundation of soil, asphalt or concrete‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اي از ﺧﺎك ‪ ،‬آﺳﻔﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻒ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺧﺎك‪ ،‬آﺳﻔﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ آﺳﻔﺎت )‪ (Asphalt‬ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺘﻦ )‪ (Concrete‬ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎك )‪ (Soil‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﺧﺎك ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫*‪ -‬اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ روي اﺳﺘﺮاﻛﭽﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻓﻠﺰي و ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺎزن دارﻧﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن در دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در روﻧﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن در دﻣﺎي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ روي دﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪاﺗﻲ در اﻳﻦ راﺑﻄﻪ اﺗﺨﺎذ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫در اﻳﻦ راﺑﻄﻪ دو روش ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه ‪ Storage Tanks‬در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,5‬روش اول "اﻟﻒ"‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﺪا از ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ روش ﻛﺎر ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن و اﻧﺘﻘﺎل آن ﺑﺮ روي اﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻠﻬﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ داراي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن؛ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻬﺎي ﻧﺴﻮز ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
43
٤٤
45
٤٦
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻛﻮﭼﻚ داراي ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزﻛﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ در ﺣﺪ )ﺷﺶ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﭘﻴﭽﺶ و ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺨﺰن‬
‫در ﻃﻮل اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ دو ﺷﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺑﺰرگ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺰن را ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ از ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺨﺰن‬
‫در دﻣﺎي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﺟﺪاً ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﻧﺎزﻟﻲ در ﺳﻘﻒ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺪون درﭘﻮش ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮوج ﺣﺮارت‬
‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ از آن در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ از ﺟﺪاره ﻣﺨﺰن در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد روش اول‪ :‬در اﻳﻦ روش ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮد ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﺎً ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن آﺳﻴﺒﻲ از ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ وارد ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ روي ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﮔﺮاف در‬
‫ﺣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻛﻮردر ﺛﺒﺖ و آﻣﺎده اراﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺮاف؛ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬در ﺿﻤﻦ ﭼﻮن ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺟﺪا از ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫‪ -2,6‬روش اول "ب"‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﺪا از ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﺨﺰن ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ و ﻫﻴﺪروﺗﺴﺖ و در‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت رﻧﮓ آﻣﻴﺰي ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪ -2,7‬روش دوم‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ روش ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﺗﺎ ﺟﺪاً از آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن و ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﺑﺪﻻﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻣﻜﺎن ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻮراخ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ‪ Telltale hole‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ روش ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺮداﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,8‬ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ روش دوم‬
‫‪ -2,9‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ اول؛ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن و ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ‪Anchor Bolts‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮدن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (Anchor Bolts‬اﻳﻦ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪه ﮔﻲ در ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ؛ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از اﻳﻦ اﺗﻔﺎق راﻫﻜﺎر ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫)‪ (Anchor Bolts‬ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و اﻃﺮاف ﭘﻴﭻ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ‪ Anchor Chair‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺷﻜﺎري ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮي‬
‫اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻣﺨﺰن از ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﺪن رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد و اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ آزاداﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد و آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن وارد‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮد و ﭘﺲ از ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻬﺮه ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (Anchor Bolts‬از واﺷﺮ ﻓﻠﺰي‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺑﺮﻳﺪه ﺷﺪهي ﺑﺎﻻي ‪ Anchor Chair‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪) Figure 5.28‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (52‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺼﺮاﺣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﺑﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﺎﻻي ‪ Anchor Chair‬اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻛﻪ ‪ Annular Plate‬ﭘﺸﺖ ‪ Anchor Bolts‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ از‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ Anchor Bolt‬در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Annular Plate‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ آزاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ Figure 5.28‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Annular Plate‬و ‪ Anchor-Bolt‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ Clearance‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ‪ Annular Plate‬ﺑﺮش داده‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺟﺪاً ﺧﻮداري ﺷﻮد‪ .‬در واﻗﻊ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮش اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻲ‬
‫دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ در راﺳﺘﺎي اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺪون داﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن را از ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ و دﻓﺮﻣﮕﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺘﻪ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻣﺨﺎزن‪ ،‬ﻃﺮاح ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه ﻧﺸﺎن داده و در واﻗﻊ ﻗﻄﺮ داﻳﺮه ‪Anchor-Bolts‬‬
‫ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ از ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ‪ Annular Plate‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﺮده ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن در‬
‫ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ و دﻓﺮﻣﮕﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.12‬از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650-2020‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Anchor-Bolt‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ آﻣﺪه‪:‬‬

‫‪5.12 Tank Anchorage‬‬
‫‪5.12.1 When a tank is required to be mechanically anchored per 5.11 (wind),‬‬
‫‪Annex E (seismic), Annex F (internal pressure), or when a tank is mechanically‬‬
‫‪anchored for any other reason, the following minimum requirements shall be met.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.12‬ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺰن‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.12.1‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ‪) 5.11‬ﺑﺎد(‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ )‪) (E‬ﻟﺮزه اي‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻞ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﺮزه(‪،‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ )‪) (F‬ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻞ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻻزم دارد‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮآورده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪5.12.11 The anchors and their attachments shall be designed to allow for radial‬‬
‫‪expansion and contraction of the tank shell resulting from temperature change and‬‬
‫‪product loading. ….See Figure 5.28 for a depiction of the anchor chair top plate‬‬
‫‪bolt-hole slot option.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.12.11‬ﻣﻬﺎرﻫﺎ و ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و اﻧﻘﺒﺎض ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻣﺎ و ﺑﺎرﮔﺬاري ﻣﺤﺼﻮل را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 5.28‬را ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي از ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻴﺎر ﺳﻮراخ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ و ﻣﻬﺮه ورق ﺑﺎﻻي ‪) Anchor Chair‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻟﻮﺑﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮش ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ( ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
٥٢
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ‪ Anchor-Bolt‬در ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ از دو زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ -2,10‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (Anchor Bolts‬در ﻣﺨﺰن ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻬﺎر ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬وﺟﻮد ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (Anchor Bolts‬ﻧﻘﺶ‬
‫اﺳﺎﺳﻲ دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي درك ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ اﻧﻜﺮﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﻜﺮﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ Anchor-Bolts‬وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ دو دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ و ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪(*) .‬‬
‫ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي اﻳﺴﺘﺎ و ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻃﻮل زﻣﺎن ﺑﺪون ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزه وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وزن ﻣﺮده‪ ،‬وزن ﺳﺎزه‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻧﻔﺮات‪ ،‬ﺑﺎر ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي اﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ اﻧﻜﺮ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎ را ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﻃﻮل زﻣﺎن ﻛﻢ و زﻳﺎد ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎزه ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻮك‪ ،‬زﻟﺰﻟﻪ و ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻮك‪ :‬ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزه وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از آن را ﻧﺎﺑﻮد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﺨﺖ و ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﺷﻮك و ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫زﻟﺰﻟﻪ‪ :‬اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺑﺎر دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﺮزش ﺳﺎزه و ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ آن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﻮر و ﻣﺮور ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‪ ،‬رﻓﺖ و آﻣﺪ اﻓﺮاد‪ ،‬اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر و ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎرش‬
‫ﺑﺎران و ﺑﺮف و اﻣﺜﺎل اﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎزه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮور زﻣﺎن ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪*-( https://www.markazeahan.com/what-is-anchor-bolt/‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه‪ :‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺣﺮارت ‪ 600 °C to 650 °C‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫)‪ (Anchor Bolts‬و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﮕﺮد ﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺮك در ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ؛ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺣﺮارت ﺑﺎﻻي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ دﻳﻮاره‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻮي ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن ‪ Concrete Ring Wall‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺮك ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و اﻧﻘﺒﺎض ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ )در ﺑﺘﻦ *(‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮاد در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻣﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮاد وﻗﺘﻲ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺮد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎت دﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻧﺪازه ﺳﺎزه ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ ﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﺰرﮔﺮاه ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن‪ ،‬آن‬
‫را در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﺛﺮات دﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻮن ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و اﻧﻘﺒﺎض ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻣﺎ ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﺎزه رخ ﻣﻲ‬
‫دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻣﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﺪراﺗﺎﺳﻴﻮن ﺳﻴﻤﺎن )ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮﻣﺎزا ﻛﻪ در آن ﺳﻴﻤﺎن ﺑﺎ آب در ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻃﻲ از‬
‫ﺑﺘﻦ واﻛﻨﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ و ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﻴﺪرات ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﺎت ﻛﻠﺴﻴﻢ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد( اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺣﺪود ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻧﻴﻢ در درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ (10x10-6/C‬اﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫اﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮي از ‪ 7‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻧﻢ در درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﻪ ازاي ﻫﺮ ‪ 30,5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ‪ 38‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‪ ،‬داراي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮل ‪ 1,7‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و اﻧﻘﺒﺎض ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺘﻦ در درﺟﻪ اول ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع ﺳﻨﮕﺪاﻧﻪ )ﺳﻨﮓ رﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮓ آﻫﻚ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺮاﻧﻴﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﻴﻤﺎن آب‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻦ ﺑﺘﻦ و رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫از ﺑﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﺳﻨﮕﺪاﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ را ﺑﺮ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و اﻧﻘﺒﺎض ﺑﺘﻦ دارد‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮان ﮔﺮﻣﺎ را دﻓﻊ ﻛﺮد ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﺷﺪﻳﺪي در ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎرﻫﺎي ﻋﻈﻴﻢ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻧﻘﺒﺎض ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ روي‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺪون ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻣﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ آن ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد اﺧﺘﻼف ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮه ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردن اﻋﻀﺎي ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫دﻳﮕﺮي از ﺳﺎزه‪ ،‬آرﻣﺎﺗﻮرﻫﺎي داﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﺪه ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ اﺟﺎزه دارد دﻣﺎ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن دارد‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ در ﻃﻮل ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻬﺎر ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺘﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و در ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺮك ﺑﺨﻮرد‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﻮﺛﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ راه ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردن ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ از ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻣﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻧﺸﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻦ در ﻳﻚ اﻟﮕﻮي ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ داﻳﺮﻛﺘﻮري دﻣﺎ و ﻣﻬﺎر ﺗﺮك‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮرد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ‪ THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION‬از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪https://www.engr.psu.edu/ce/courses/ce584/concrete/library/cracking/thermalexpa‬‬
‫‪nsioncontraction/thermalexpcontr.htm‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ )‪ (Caustic‬ﻳﺎ آﻣﻴﻦ )‪ (Amine‬دارﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﺮوﻳﺴﻬﺎ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ‪ NACE SP0403‬و ‪ API RP 945‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻲ دارﻧﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً‬
‫اﺟﺒﺎري اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﻳﻲ از ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن دﻳﻮاره ﺣﻠﻘﻮي ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﻬﻤﺮاه ﭘﻴﭻ و ﻣﻬﺮه ﻣﻬﺎر‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪهي )‪ (Anchor Bolt‬ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
In-situ heat treatment of storage tanks presents a number of problems:

■- Thermal expansion is usually restricted by presence of anchor bolts
■- Concrete will be damaged by exposure to high temperatures
■- Any concrete rebar close to the surface of the ring wall will get hot, and expand
causing further damage to the concrete
■- Further complications can also arise due to:
●- Bituminous sand in fills
●- Secondary HDPE membranes close to tank surface
●- PVC tubes close to tank underside for CP monitoring
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد )روي ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن( ﺗﻌﺪادي از ﻣﺸﻜﻼت را ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ آورد‬
.‫( ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬Anchor Bolts) ‫ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬-■
.‫ در ﻣﻌﺮض دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺘﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ‬-■
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﮕﺮد ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ دﻳﻮاره ﺣﻠﻘﻮي داغ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺘﻦ‬-■
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ ﻋﻮارض ﺑﻌﺪي ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ دﻻﻳﻞ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬-■
‫ ﺷﻦ و ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻴﺮ اﻧﺪود ﺷﺪه‬-●
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺨﺰن‬HDPE ‫ ﻏﺸﺎي‬-●
CP‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻲ وي ﺳﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺑﺮ‬-●
‫ ﺑﻪ‬PIP STE03020 ‫در ﻣﻮرد اوﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
:‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬6.3.6 ‫ در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬.‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ داده اﺳﺖ‬
55
6.3.6 Concrete at High Temperatures

6.3.6.1 Concrete compressive strength decreases as temperatures increase.
Reduction in strength results from temperature, moisture content, loading history,
and the type of aggregate used. As the concrete heats up, the aggregate and cement
expand at different rates. This, coupled with the different stiffnesses for the
aggregate and the cement, creates a complex interaction.
‫ ﺑﺘﻦ در دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ‬: 6.3.6 ‫ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬-*
، ‫ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ )ﺑﺘﻦ( از دﻣﺎ‬.‫ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺎري ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬: 6.3.6.1 ‫ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬-*
‫ ﺳﻨﮕﺪاﻧﻪ و ﺳﻴﻤﺎن ﺑﺎ‬، ‫ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن ﺑﺘﻦ‬.‫ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي و ﻧﻮع ﺳﻨﮕﺪاﻧﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬، ‫ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻨﮕﺪاﻧﻪ و ﺳﻴﻤﺎن‬، ‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪه اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
6.3.6.2 For concretes with limestone or gravel aggregate in temperatures up to 315
°C (600°F), the strength reduction is very small. Concrete with other aggregates,
however, may have up to a 40% strength reduction at 315 °C(600°F).
‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬315 ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺘﻨﻬﺎي داراي ﺳﻨﮓ آﻫﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﮓ رﻳﺰه در دﻣﺎي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬: 6.3.6.2 ‫ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬-*
‫ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬٪40 ‫ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﮕﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ‬.‫ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ اﺳﺖ‬، (‫ درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬600 )
.‫ درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬600 ) ‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬315 ‫ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ در‬
6.3.6.3 At temperatures greater than 315 °C(600°F), the cement starts to dehydrate
and its strength drops off more dramatically. Therefore, for temperatures higher
than 315 °C(600°F), special types of cement such as alumina cement should be
considered. Using alumina cement concrete for tank foundations with tank
temperatures less than 315 °C(600°F) is very costly and probably not necessary.
‫ ﺳﻴﻤﺎن ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﻢ‬، (‫ درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬600) ‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬315 ‫ در دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از‬: 6.3.6.3 ‫ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬-*
‫ درﺟﻪ‬315 ‫ ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از‬، ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫آﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ آن ﺑﺎ اﻓﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮي ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬.‫ اﻧﻮاع ﺧﺎﺻﻲ از ﺳﻴﻤﺎن ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻤﺎن آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬، (‫ درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬600) ‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
(‫ درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬600) ‫ درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬315 ‫از ﺑﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻤﺎن آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﭘﺮﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﺳﺖ و اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﻻزم ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
6.3.6.4 For concretes required to tolerate temperatures less than 600°F:
a. Regular concrete with an appropriate strength-reduction factor may be used
for foundations.
b. For tank temperatures in the range of 200°F to 400°F, 4,000 psi concrete
should be used.
c. For tank temperatures in the range of 400°F to 600°F, 5,000 psi concrete
should be used.
d. Although higher strength concrete is used, in both cases, the foundation
should be designed using a reduced strength of 3,000 psi to provide an
adequate safety factor.
315 °C(600°F) ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺤﻤﻞ دﻣﺎي ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬: 6.3.6.4 ‫ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬-*
٥٦
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ب‪ -‬ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎي ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻣﺤﺪوده ‪ ، 93-204ºC‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺑﺘﻦ )‪ 4000 psi (~30 MPa‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ج‪ -‬ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎي ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻣﺤﺪوده ‪ ، 204-315ºC‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺑﺘﻦ )‪ 5000 psi (~35 MPa‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫د‪ -‬اﮔﺮﭼﻪ از ﺑﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ در ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﻮرد ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ )‪ 3000 psi (20 MPa‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪6.3.6.5 Reinforced concrete design should be in accordance with ACI 318‬‬
‫‪requirements and ringwall design guidelines as specified in this Practice.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 6.3.6.5‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺑﺘﻦ آرﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ‪ ACI 318‬و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ رﻳﻨﮓ‬
‫وال ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ روش ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,11‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ دوم؛ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬

‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ در دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اش ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻳﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺎرج‬
‫از ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ آن ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع را ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار داد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻛﻮﭼﻚ داراي ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزﻛﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ در ﺣﺪ )ﺷﺶ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﭘﻴﭽﺶ و ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺨﺰن‬
‫در ﻃﻮل اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ دو ﺷﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺑﺰرگ ﻣﺨﺰن را ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ از ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺨﺰن در‬
‫دﻣﺎي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﺟﺪاً ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد و ﻧﺎزﻟﻲ در ﺳﻘﻒ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺪون درﭘﻮش ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮوج ﺣﺮارت‬
‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ از آن در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -2,12‬اﺟﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫■‪ -‬رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ آﻣﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻋﻤﺎل ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن‪ ،‬ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺖ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻮش ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎي‬
‫اﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ASME SEC. IX‬از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺟﻮش ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا اﻧﺠﺎم دادن‬
‫ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﺪادن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺟﻮش ﺟﺰو ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎي اﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻫﻤﻪ ‪ NDT‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﮔﺰارﺷﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮي ﺑﻼﺗﻜﻠﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪ NDT MAP‬ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع‪ ، PWHT‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻬﺎرﻫﺎ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن آزاد اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ و ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﺷﻮد و از ﺳﺎﭘﻮرت ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺨﺰن دارﺑﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و اﻳﻤﻦ اﺟﺮا ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ و ﺳﻘﻒ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﺸﻢ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً از ﺷﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺸﻢ ﺳﻨﮓ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻮري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﻢ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ رﻳﺰش و ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻧﻮار ﻛﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻤﺎم ﭘﺸﻢ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮارﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ و رﻳﺰش ﭘﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻬﺎي ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺨﺰن‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪ PWHT Procedure for Storage Tank‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد و ﭘﺲ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺪداً اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺎرﻫﺎ )ﺳﻴﻢ راﺑﻂ دﻣﺎ( ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﻮز ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪود ﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دارﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻛﻮردر وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻨﻬﻮل ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي روي ﺳﻘﻒ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺮوج دود و ﮔﺎزﻫﺎ و ﺣﺮارت اﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ در ﻣﺤﻞ روﺑﺮوي ﻣﻨﻬﻮل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﺮارت ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮع اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ و ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن‬
‫ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻼس اﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮارت ﻻزم را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﻳﻲ از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺳﻮز‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫)*( ﻣﺸﻌﻞ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا و ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد( در‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﻀﺎي اﻳﻤﻦ اﻧﺮژي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﺑﻪ اﻧﺮژي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ اﻳﻦ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﻣﻘﺪاري ﮔﺎز ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ از راه دود ﻛﺶ ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ اﻧﺮژي ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دو روش ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ و ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫اﻃﺮاف اﻧﺘﻘﺎل داده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﺸﻌﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‪ :‬ﭘﺮوﻓﻴﻞ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎري و … ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻛﺎر‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎدهﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ در ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺑﻮﻳﻠﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در اﻧﻮاع دﻳﮓﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻌﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻃﺮز ﻛﺎر ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺷﺶ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )ﮔﺎز‪ ،‬ﮔﺎزوﻳﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎزوت( از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ورودي و اﻳﺠﺎد ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز را ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬در ﻣﺸﻌﻞ و دﻳﮓ ﺗﻌﺪادي ﻛﻨﺘﺮلﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان و زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام از ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت دﻳﮓ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دود ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آن‬
‫از ﺳﻠﻮل ﻓﺘﻮاﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن و از ﻛﺎر اﻓﺘﺎدن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻳﺠﺎد آﺗﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺮاردادن آﺗﺶ در ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫وارد ﻛﺮدن و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻫﻮا‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺎﻳﻊ و ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻫﻮا‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺑﻲ و ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻗﺒﻠﻲ و ﺑﺎ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫در ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز در ﻓﺮاﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻗﺪرت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ را در ﺟﺪولﻫﺎﻳﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲدﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ اﻋﺪاد ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ و ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪرت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬از آﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻗﺪرت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ در ﻓﺸﺎر اﺗﺴﻤﻔﺮ )ﺳﻄﺢ درﻳﺎي آزاد( ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲرﺳﺪ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ازاء ﻫﺮﻫﺰار ﻣﺘﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﺳﻄﺢ درﻳﺎ ‪ %13‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺪرت ﻣﺸﻌﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ اﻓﺰود‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ در ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺳﻄﺢ درﻳﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع زﻳﺎدي دارﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﻌﻞﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگﺗﺮي‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎي ﭘﺴﺖ اﺣﺘﻴﺎج اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)*(‪ -‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‪(http://behinenergyco.ir) :‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز و روش ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫)*( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﺧﺎﻧﻪ دو ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ زﻳﺮ در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن درج ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ آن ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎزه ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ و ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎزه ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً راﻧﺪﻣﺎن واﻗﻌﻲ دﻳﮓ را ﺑﺎ درﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﺳﻄﺢ درﻳﺎ ﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ﻛﻠﻲ اول ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮل دوم ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

‫)*( ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ و وزن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ دﻳﮓ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮب ارزش ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ در راﻧﺪﻣﺎن ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬و از اﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ را اﻧﺠﺎم داد‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي دﻳﮓ آﺑﮕﺮم ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ 1000000‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺮي‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ kcal/hr‬ﺑﺎ راﻧﺪﻣﺎن ‪ 90‬درﺻﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزي ﺑﺎ ارزش ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ 10500‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪1000000 ÷ (10500 × 0.9) = 105.8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ارزش ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ 10750‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1000000 ÷ (10750 × 0.9) = 103.4‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﺎزوﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ارزش ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ 10900‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1000000 ÷ (10900 × 0.9) = 101.94‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫)*( ﺑﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)‪(https://mag.damapouya.com/guide-to-calculate-and-select-burner/‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‬

‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮده و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫داﺷﺘﻦ ارزش ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ دﺑﻲ ﺟﺮﻣﻲ ‪ m‬دات و دﺑﻲ ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ‪ V‬دات‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ از رواﺑﻂ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ ‪ L‬ارزش ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫)*(‪ -‬ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‪-‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﺧﺎﻧﻪ )‪(http://tarazenergy.com‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه‪ :‬از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﺎز ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﭘﺲ از‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري )‪ ، (PWHT‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ )‪ (Burners‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﺎز ﻳﺎ‬
‫روﻏﻦ از ‪ 500،000‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺮي در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ 8،000،000‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﺎﻟﺮي در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺜﻞ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ‪Flush-type cleanout fittings‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ در ﻛﻮره ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬از ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ )‪ (Burners‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫■‪ -‬رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻗﺒﻞ از راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫)*( ﻣﻮارد ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه ﻗﺒﻞ از راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزي و ﮔﺎزوﻳﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬از ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮدن ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ دﻳﮓ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪) .‬زﻳﺎد ﺑﻮدن ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﺒﺐ اﺳﺘﻬﻼك دﻳﮓ و‬
‫دود ﻛﺮدن و ﺧﺎم ﺳﻮزي و ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺎﻻي ﮔﺎز و آﺳﻴﺐ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ دﻳﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪،‬ﻛﻢ ﺑﻮدن ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺒﺐ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك ﻣﺸﻌﻞ و ﻛﻤﺒﻮد ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪ -2‬داﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰن و ﻣﺴﻴﺮ دود ﻛﺶ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻼﻧﭻ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻓﻘﻲ و ﺗﺮاز ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻗﺒﻞ از راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮرﻳﻜﻪ اﺟﺴﺎم ﺳﺒﻚ و ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ آن وارد ﻧﺸﻮد و ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﻮا را ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﺴﺎزﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ دودﻛﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻫﻤﺎن ﻣﻨﻬﻮل ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه روي ﺳﻘﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً در ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ و ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻌﻞ و ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ از ﭘﻤﭗ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ از ذرات ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده( ﺿﺮوري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ درﺳﺖ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ در ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ در داﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬از ﻋﺪم ﻧﺸﺖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﻜﺎر رﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﻓﺘﻮﺳﻞ( ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ و ﺷﻴﺸﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ را‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً روﺑﺮوي ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻗﺮار دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -12‬ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ را روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)*( ‪ -‬ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪ -https://www.bamintahvie.com/article‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻦ اﻧﺮژي‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ و ﮔﺎزي‪:‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﻓﺮو رﻳﺨﺘﻦ و دﻓﺮﻣﮕﻲ آن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ دﻳﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺪت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ و ﻛﺮوي ﺑﻪ روش ‪Internal Firing‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ از روشﻫﺎي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺎت ﻓﻠﺰي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ‪ Internal Firing‬اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آن ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎي اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻳﺎ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻮره ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﺻﻞ از اﺣﺘﺮاق و‬
‫اﻳﺠﺎد ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺳﻴﺎل داغ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺎزلﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮروي ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت از داﺧﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون‪ ،‬ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﺻﻮﻻً اﻳﻦ روش ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ ، Post Weld‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮدن ‪ Refractory‬و ﺗﻨﺶزداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻛﺮوي‬
‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮد و ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً ﺑﺮروي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺎ اﺑﻌﺎد و اوزان ﺑﺰرگ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ آنﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﮔﺮدد ﻛﻪ اﻟﺒﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ روش ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت داﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺮدد‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ روش ﺣﺮارتدﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﺸﻌﻞﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﺮاﻗﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮد و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮد‪ .‬ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ در اﻳﻦ روش ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ Rate‬اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺣﺮارت‬
‫در ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻗﻄﻌﻪ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺪت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺣﺮارت‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)*(‪ -‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ )‪(https://heatmfs.com/services#1614714846963-dfbb3740-28b7‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
67
٦٨
69
٧٠
‫‪ -2,13‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن‬

‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Flush-type cleanout fitting‬و ‪ Flush-type shell connection‬و‬
‫ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻧﻴﺎز آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﻓﺼﻞ اول از دﻳﺪﮔﺎه اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ در ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮاﺣﺖ دﻗﻴﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫از ﻧﺼﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (Stationary Furnace‬ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,14‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دو ﮔﺮوه ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮوه ‪ Fabrication Manufacturer‬ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Shell, Bottom, Roof Plates, Nozzels,‬و‬
‫‪ Attachments,‬و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺮاﻛﭽﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺟﻮش‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﻪ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﻨﺮال ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻣﺤﻞ و‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺑﻌﺎدي ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ در ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ آن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ از ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻜﺴﭽﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻬﺎرﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮارت ‪ 650‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻋﺚ از‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ رﻓﺘﻦ رول و ﻗﻮس ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻧﺸﻮد و ﺳﭙﺲ در ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (Stationary Furnace‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و آﻣﺎده ارﺳﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ )ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ(‬
‫ﻻزم اﺳﺖ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻣﻮارد ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر )‪ (Vessel‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﮕﻲ ﻫﺎ )‪ (Heads‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ )‪(Flush-type cleanout door‬‬
‫در ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ دو ﻣﺪل ﻛﻮره ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻣﻮﻗﺖ )‪(Temporary Furnace‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﺰرگ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺴﺎز و ﺗﺎﺷﺎ در اﻫﻮاز و ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي و آذرآب‬
‫در اراك ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت ﺧﻮد ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺰاﻳﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي اراك(‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮه ﮔﻴﺮي از ﺳﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺎت ﻓﻠﺰي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ و وﺟﻮد اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ و ﺗﻴﻢ ﻓﻨﻲ و ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺑﺎ دو ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﺎز ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ و ‪ LPG‬و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ آﻻﻳﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﺮش و ﺣﺴﺎس‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاﺛﺮ اﻳﺠﺎد آﻻﻳﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ در ﻣﺼﺮف اﻧﺮژي ﺑﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪررﻓﺖ اﻧﺮژي‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن و اﻳﺠﺎد اﻋﻮﺟﺎج در ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺮ اﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪ ،‬اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎي‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻮره ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ ASME‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي اﺧﺘﻼف ‪46‬‬
‫درﺟﻪ را ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻲ داﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮف ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ و ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺧﺎص ﺑﺮاي اﻳﺠﺎد اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺧﺎﻃﺮ اﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻼف را ﺑﻪ ‪ 8‬درﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داده اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ‪ High Velocity‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻫﻮا و اﻳﺠﺎد ﻫﻢ دﻣﺎﻳﻲ در ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻮره‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اراﺋﻪ ‪ Graph‬و ﮔﺰارش ﺑﺪون وﻗﻔﻪ از ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻗﻴﻖ دﻣﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﻪ و ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻤﺎم اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ‪ PLC‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‪ ،‬درﻳﭽﻪ ورودي ﮔﺎز و ﻫﻮا و ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دود از دودﻛﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮره‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪ 250‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﺘﻮي ﺳﺮاﻣﻴﻜﻲ در دﻳﻮاره ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪف ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﺗﻼف ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ و‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ دﻣﺎﻳﻲ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻮره‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺮروي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮل آن ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻃﻮل ﻛﻮره ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ -2,15‬ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ دﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻗﺮار دادن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت در آن‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650-2020-Para. 5.7.4.6‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ – (b‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺮخ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 800‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 220‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 400‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ اﻳﻨﭻ ‪ ،‬از ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﻮاره‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻧﻪ( ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﮔﺮم ﮔﺮدد‪ ،‬ﺷﻮد ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ در ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 220‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 400‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ - (c‬در ﺧﻼل دوره ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Heating‬دﻣﺎ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 15) 4,6‬ﻓﻮت( ﻣﺘﺮي از ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از )‪ 140 °C (250 °F‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﻣﺪت دﻣﺎي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫)‪ ، (Holding temperature‬ﺑﻴﺶ از )‪ 85 °C (150 °F‬در ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻼف داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت )‪) 595 °C (1100 °F‬ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎي آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪5.7.4.8‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎز داﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ (.‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ازاي ﻫﺮ اﻳﻨﭻ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ )ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﺰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎت دﻳﻮاره ﻣﺨﺰن ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد( ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬در ﻃﻮل دوره ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ (Heating‬و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫)‪ ، (Holding‬ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎده ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار دارد ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت را درون ﻛﻮره ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﻢ دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد )‪ 800‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻛﻮردر ﺑﺮ‬
‫روي ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,16‬ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
٧٤
75
‫‪ -2,17‬ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ درون ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬

‫در ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺸﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺰن درون ﻛﻮره ﺗﻤﺎس داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ API-650-2020-Para. 5.7.4.6 (c‬دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬

‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : 5.7.4.6 (c‬در ﻃﻮل دوره ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ (Heating‬و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري )‪ ، (Holding‬ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎده ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار دارد ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
٧٨
‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ™‪ Selas Superflame‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ‪ NOx‬ﻛﻢ‬

‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي دﻣﺎي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2500‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ 1371‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد( و داراي اﺣﺘﺮاق دو ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫اي ﺑﺮاي ‪ NOx‬ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪The burners are ideal for installation in either brick or fiber wall furnaces, and are‬‬
‫‪easily mounted to the furnace.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺼﺐ در ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي آﺟﺮي ﻳﺎ دﻳﻮاري اﻟﻴﺎﻓﻲ اﻳﺪه آل ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ روي ﻛﻮره ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫?‪What is low NOx or Ultra-low Nox‬‬
‫‪NOx is an abbreviation for nitrogen oxides – a collection of harmful and toxic‬‬
‫‪greenhouse gases. These gases are released when fuel is burned at high heat like in‬‬
‫‪an engine or home gas furnace. Low NOx and Ultra-Low NOx refers to emission‬‬
‫‪limits on these products and are determined by local EPA standards and will vary‬‬
‫‪for each type of heating equipment.‬‬
‫‪ NOx‬ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ‪ NOx‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻛﻢ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫)‪ (NOx‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ اﻛﺴﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﺘﺮوژن اﺳﺖ ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اي از ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧﻪ اي ﻣﻀﺮ و ﺳﻤﻲ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫آزاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ در ﺣﺮارت زﻳﺎد ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮره ﮔﺎز ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺳﻮزاﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد ‪ NOx‬ﻛﻢ و ‪NOx‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻛﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﺸﺎر در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت اﺷﺎره دارد و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ EPA‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ در دو ﻃﺮف ﻛﻮره ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و در ﺿﻤﻦ روﺑﺮوي ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺘﻲ ﺣﺮارت داﺧﻞ ﻛﻮره ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪ -2,18‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪Temperature Control‬‬

‫در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮاﺣﺖ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪5.1 Use the local control panel in the furnace to control the burner. The local‬‬
‫‪control panel to guide the burner control unit is the basis of air pressure‬‬
‫‪control ignition, fuel valve control and so on.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.1‬از ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ در ﻛﻮره ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺸﻌﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺒﻨﺎي اﺣﺘﺮاق ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﺪاوم ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰار ﺛﺒﺖ دﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ و ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎدل ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫از درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺸﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﺸﻌﻠﻬﺎ در ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻛﻮره ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻛﺮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺸﻪ اي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻛﻨﺎر ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ درب ورودي ﻛﻮره‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ از اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در واﻗﻊ رﺟﻮع ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭘﻨﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ دﻣﺎي‬
‫داﺧﻞ ﻛﻮره ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬دﻣﺎي ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪد دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭘﻨﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ روﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ در ﻧﺮخ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ از ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ردﻳﺎﺑﻲ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ 5.7.4.6 (c‬از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎ در زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Heating‬و در زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري دﻣﺎ ‪ Holding Temprature‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪5.7.4.6 (c) During the heating period, the temperature throughout the portion of the‬‬
‫‪tank being heated shall not vary more than 140 °C (250 °F) within any 4.6 m (15‬‬
‫‪ft) interval of length and, when at the hold temperature, not more than 85 °C (150‬‬
‫‪°F) throughout the portion of the tank being heated. A minimum temperature of‬‬
‫)‪595 °C (1100 °F‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ])‪ : [5.7.4.6 (c‬در ﺧﻼل دوره ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Heating‬دﻣﺎ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ﺣﺎل ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 4,6‬ﻣﺘﺮي از ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 140 °C‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﻣﺪت دﻣﺎي‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري )‪ ، (Holding temperature‬ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 85 °C‬در ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺧﺘﻼف‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ‪ 595 °C‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ اﻋﺪاد در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺎرا ﮔﺮاف زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪5.4 During the holding period (time at PWHT temperature) the difference between‬‬
‫‪temperature readings of any two thermocouples shall not exceed 40°C. No‬‬
‫‪thermocouple reading may exceed the temperature range specified on the WPS‬‬
‫‪used to weld the joint.‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.4‬در ﻃﻮل دوره ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ) زﻣﺎن در دﻣﺎي ‪ (PWHT‬اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ دﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ دو‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ‪ 40‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎه ﻗﺮاﺋﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺷﺪه در ‪ WPS‬ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه‪ :‬در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Cooling Rate‬اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ AWS D10.10‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪11.1 Temperature Uniformity‬‬
‫رﺟﻮع ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪11.1 Temperature Uniformity. Requirements regarding temperature uniformity‬‬
‫‪are generally specified separately for the heating/cooling and hold portions of the‬‬
‫‪PWHT cycle.‬‬
‫‪Maximum Recommended Temperature Differences for PWHT‬‬
‫‪During heating and cooling, the maximum temperature difference within the‬‬
‫‪heated band should be 250°F (139°C) or as limited by the maximum axial‬‬
‫‪temperature gradient‬‬
‫)‪AWS D10.10/D10.10M:1999 (R2009‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ :11.1‬ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺘﻲ دﻣﺎ‪ :‬اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺘﻲ دﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ‪ PWHT‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﺎوت دﻣﺎي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ‪PWHT‬‬
‫در ﺧﻼل ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Heating/Cooling‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎ در ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺣﺪ‬
‫دﻣﺎي ‪ 250‬درﺟﻪ ﻓﺎرﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ 139‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮادﻳﺎن دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ AWS D10.10‬در ﺣﺪود ‪ 139‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل اﺳﺖ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻋﺪد دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً دﻣﺎي ‪ 140‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650‬در ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻣﺎي ‪139‬‬
‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ AWS D10.10‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻳﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
٨٤
‫‪ -2,19‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎز ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎي ‪ Telltale hole‬در ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Flush –type cleanout fitting‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﻼً ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ داراي ﭘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ )‪ (Rienforcement Pad‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ در ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮراخ ‪ Telltale hole‬آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬زﻳﺮا ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮراخ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﺎً ﺑﻪ اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد آﻧﺮا ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮش ﻣﺴﺪود ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻮرم و اﻳﺠﺎد ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻘﻮل‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ )‪ (Rienforcement Pad‬و ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ اﺛﺮ ﺣﺮارت ﺑﺎﻻي درون ﻛﻮره ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪API 650 - 5.7.2.10 Each reinforcing plate for shell openings shall be provided with a 6‬‬
‫‪mm (1/4 in.) diameter telltale hole. The hole shall be located on the horizontal centerline‬‬
‫‪and shall be open to the atmosphere.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ (5.7.2.10‬ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮاي دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي )ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي( ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺳﻮراﺧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ 1/4‬اﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي اﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﻪ اﺗﻤﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫‪ -2,20‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﺪه ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪ (Flanges faces‬و ﻣﺤﻞ رزوه ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ در ﻛﻮره ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ از اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫زﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪*- All machined surface, such as flanges faces, threaded bolts holes, threads, etc. Shall‬‬
‫‪be protected from oxidation during the heat treatment by coating with de-‬‬
‫‪oxaluminite or other suitable material.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﻮح ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﭻ و ﻣﻬﺮه ﻫﺎي رزوه ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬رزوه ﻫﺎ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ دﻫﻲ دﺋﻮ‪ -‬اﮔﺰاﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﺖ )‪ (de-oxaluminite‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ دﻳﮕﺮ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻛﺴﻴﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﻃﻮل‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﺋﻮ‪ -‬اﮔﺰاﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﺖ ‪ : DEOXALUMINITE‬ﺑﺎزدارﻧﺪه اﺻﻠﻲ از زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ و ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺗﺎزه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬از زﻣﺎن آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ واﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ -2,21‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ وﻇﻴﻔﻪ دارد ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ‬
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ را ﺛﺒﺖ و ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاف اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻮدن و ﻋﺪم دﺳﺘﻜﺎري در ﻧﻤﻮدار ﮔﺮاف اﺑﺘﺪا ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع در‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺛﺒﺖ ﮔﺮاف ﺑﺎزرس ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﮔﺮاف را اﻣﻀﺎء ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و در ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮاف از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮاف ﺑﺎزرس اﻣﻀﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ در ﺣﻀﻮر ﺑﺎزرس ﮔﺮاف از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﺪا ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮاي درﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ دادن و ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮاف‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﻪ زﻧﮓ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ در ﮔﺮاف‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮه اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ‪ NDT‬ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬و‬
‫ﻣﻮارد دﻳﮕﺮ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﻟﺰاﻣﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬در اداﻣﻪ ﻣﻮاردي در‬
‫راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ اﺷﺎره ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﻧﺤﻮي اﺗﺼﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح ذﻳﻞ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬
6-Thermocouples & Thermocouple Extension
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺳﻴﺎر‬-6
6.1 Thermocouples shall be Type K(Chromel-Alumel) or Type J(iron-Constantan).
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬J (iron-Constantan) ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮع‬K (Chromel-Alumel) ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع‬-6,1
6.2 Thermocouples shall be attached to the workpiece by the direct wire

capacitance discharge welding method.
Note: The maximum recommended spacing between measuring junctions 1 and
2 is 1/4 in. (6 mm) and not less than 2mm. The junction to be insulated using
high temperature putty. The thermocouples shall have valid calibration
certificates.
‫ و ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ روش ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﺎزن ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬-6,2
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬.‫( ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﻮد‬Putty) ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬2 ‫از‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
٨٨
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ‪ 1‬و ‪ 6) 2‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ( اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬
‫)*(‪ -‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ داراي دو ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آن آﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎ دارد و ﺑﻪ‬
‫راﺣﺘﻲ روي ﻓﻠﺰات آﻫﻨﻲ )ﻓﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ( ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﺪ و ﺑﺮق را ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ اﻧﺒﺮدﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ آن ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﻮد ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﺻﻮل ﻛﺎر اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﺟﻮش داده ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ اﻧﺒﺮدﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و در ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺟﻼ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮد‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ زدن دﻛﻤﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻮش‬
‫ﺧﻮردن ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ ﻏﻼف ﻋﺎﻳﻖ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮد اﻧﺒﺮدﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق را ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬا اﺗﺼﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫)*(‪ -‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از "ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ اي ﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ"‪ -‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﺳﺘﺎر ﻣﺤﻤﻮدي‬
‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ‪ :‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻧﻮع ‪CR100‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازه و وزن ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‪188mm * 185 * 74 :‬؛ ‪ 2.7‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ؛ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮرد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‪ 5.6 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ‪:‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر )ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي دﻗﻴﻖ دﻣﺎ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ(؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﭘﺲ از ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‪ :‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻧﻮع ‪CR100‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازه و وزن ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‪188mm * 185 * 74 :‬؛ ‪ 2.7‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ؛ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮرد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‪ 5.6 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم‬
‫اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ‪:‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر )ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي دﻗﻴﻖ دﻣﺎ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ(؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﭘﺲ از ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎر ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﻔﻮذ ‪ ، <0.2mm‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﻔﻮذ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ‪ <0.3mm‬؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺪرت ‪ 2000‬ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﻣﺪار ﭘﺲ از ﻳﻚ زﻣﺎن ﺟﻮش ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﺷﺎرژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎي ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺎرژ؛‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LED‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺼﺮي را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
91
6.3 All extension cables, compensating cables, and jumper cables in the
measurement or control circuits shall be the specified thermocouple wire or
the matching extension wire.
٩٢
‫‪ -6,3‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺳﻴﺎر‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ و ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺟﺎﻣﭙﺮ در ﻣﺪارﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺠﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎً‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ آن ﻫﻤﺨﻮاﻧﻲ )ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ( داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.4 The thermocouple to compensation lead connection shall be a‬‬
‫‪minimum of 0.5m from the heated zone, and that the temperature at‬‬
‫‪the junction is to be in the range of 0-80°C.‬‬
‫‪ -6,4‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ از ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﺮارت ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ راﺑﻂ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ و ﭘﺮوﮔﺮاﻣﺮ(‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و دﻣﺎ در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل در ﻣﺤﺪوده ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 80‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ در ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ زﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺤﻮه اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻴﭻ و‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻣﺠﺎز داﻧﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮي اراﺋﻪ ﻧﻜﺮده اﺳﺖ‪ .‬و در ﻫﻤﻴﻦ راﺑﻄﻪ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650‬ﺳﻮال ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪Standard, Edition-API-650- 10th - Nov. 1998‬‬
‫‪Section: 3.7.4‬‬
‫‪Inquiry: 650-I-16/03‬‬
‫‪Question 2: Does API 650 specify the number and location of the thermocouples‬‬
‫?‪used to monitor the PWHT‬‬
‫‪Reply 2: No, API 650 does not address this issue.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺳﻮال ‪ :2‬آﻳﺎ ‪ API 650‬ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻈﺎرت ﺑﺮ ‪ PWHT‬را‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ‪ :2‬ﺧﻴﺮ‪ API 650 ،‬آدرﺳﻲ در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻧﻤﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪93‬‬
٩٤
‫‪ -2,22‬ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز ‪ Putty‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ .‬در ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ )‪ (Local Heating‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن زﻳﺮ ﭘﺪ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Heating pad‬ﻗﺮار ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ اﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪي ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﻮز )‪ (Putty‬روي ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ را ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﭘﺪ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع در ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻛﻮره ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدي ﻧﺪارد‪ .‬در ﺿﻤﻦ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز )‪ (Putty‬در دﺳﺘﺮس‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﺸﻢ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از اﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ واﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺳﻨﮓ زﻧﻲ ﺷﻮد و‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‪ ،‬از ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺎي ‪ MT or PT‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪ -2,23‬ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﻣﺎ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪API-650‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ‪ 4,6‬ﻣﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪API-650‬‬
‫‪5.7.4.6 (c) During the heating period, the temperature throughout the portion of the tank‬‬
‫‪being heated shall not vary more than 140 °C (250 °F) within any 4.6 m (15 ft) interval of‬‬
‫‪length and, when at the hold temperature, not more than 85 °C (150 °F) throughout the‬‬
‫‪portion of the tank being heated.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ])‪ : [5.7.4.6 (c‬در ﺧﻼل دوره ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Heating‬دﻣﺎ در ﺳﺮاﺳﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ﺣﺎل ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 4,6‬ﻣﺘﺮي از ﻃﻮل ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 140 °C‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﻣﺪت دﻣﺎي‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري )‪ ، (Holding temperature‬ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ 85 °C‬در ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺧﺘﻼف‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎً اﺷﺎره ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮر‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪7 Thermocouple Position‬‬
‫‪7.2 Sufficient thermocouples must be used to ensure that the welds and heat‬‬
‫‪affected zones achieve the uniform temperatures.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 7‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 7.2‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ ﺟﻮش و ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫دﻣﺎي ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﻣﻲ رﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺎ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ اﺷﺎره ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل اول ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪4. LOCATION OF THERMOCOUPLES‬‬
‫‪4.1. The locations of thermocouples are shown in figure 1.‬‬
‫‪4.2. For nozzles Ø =6” , in first stage tow thermocouples shall be installed on‬‬
‫‪weld line of reinforcement to shell plate and simultaneous one thermocouple‬‬
‫‪shall be installed on inside weld line of nozzle neck to shell opening as shown on‬‬
‫‪Fig.1‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 4‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 4.1‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 4.2‬ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي "‪ ، Ø=6‬در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول دو ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش )ﻓﻴﻠﺖ( ﭘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻧﺎزل( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ در داﺧﻞ )ﻣﺨﺰن( روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزل‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
4.3. For nozzles Ø =8”, in first stage tow thermocouples shall be installed on weld
line of reinforcement to shell plate and simultaneous tow thermocouples shall be
installed on inside weld line of nozzle neck to shell opening as shown on Fig.2
‫ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول دو ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش )ﻓﻴﻠﺖ( ﭘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬، Ø=8" ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي‬: 4.3 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻧﺎزل( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن دو ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ در داﺧﻞ )ﻣﺨﺰن( روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزل‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬2 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
4.4. For nozzles 8”<Ø<24”, in first stage four thermocouples shall be installed on
weld line of reinforcement to shell plate and simultaneous tow thermocouples
shall be installed on inside weld line of nozzle neck to shell opening as shown on
Fig.3
‫ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول ﭼﻬﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش )ﻓﻴﻠﺖ( ﭘﺪ‬،8”<Ø<24”, ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي‬: 4.4 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻧﺎزل( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن دو ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ در داﺧﻞ )ﻣﺨﺰن( روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬3 ‫دﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزل ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
97
4.5. For nozzles Ø =24” in the first stage five thermocouple shall be installed on
weld line of reinforcement to shell plate and after this stage three thermocouple
fig.4.
‫ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش )ﻓﻴﻠﺖ( ﭘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬، Ø=24" ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي‬: 4.5 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻧﺎزل( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ در داﺧﻞ )ﻣﺨﺰن( روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش دﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬4 ‫ﻧﺎزل ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
4.6. For nozzles Ø =36” in the first stage six thermocouples shall be installed on
weld line of reinforcement to shell plate and after this stage four thermocouples
Fig.5.
‫ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول ﺷﺶ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش )ﻓﻴﻠﺖ( ﭘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ‬، Ø=36" ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي‬: 4.6 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻧﺎزل( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ در داﺧﻞ )ﻣﺨﺰن( روي ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮش دﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬5 ‫ﻧﺎزل ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
٩٨
‫‪4.7. For all parts longer than one meter, if any exist, thermocouples shall be used‬‬
‫‪in interval of one meter.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 4.7‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮي‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
:‫در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
T1 Middle of Roof tank

T2, T3, T4 & T5 Around of the Roof
T6, T7, T8 & T9 Middle of the Tank
T10, T11, T12 & T13 Around of the Bottom
:‫ﻣﺜﺎل دوم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‬

5- POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENT
PWHT shall apply under following condition:
‫ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺟﻮش‬: 5 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺟﻮش‬
●- The number and position of the thermo couples shall be in accordance with
the below table:
:‫ ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬-●
6. Location of thermocouples
‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬: 6 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
١٠٠
6.1. The locations of thermocouples are shown in figure 1. After finishing the
PWHT the thermocouples shall be removed by grinding and magnetic
particle inspection (MPI) shall be carried out.
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬، PWHT‫ ﭘﺲ از اﺗﻤﺎم‬.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1 ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬: 6.1 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫( اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬MPI) ‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﻨﮓ زﻧﻲ ﺟﺪا ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ذرات ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
6.2. For all nozzles Ø ≤ 8" one thermocouple shall be installed on each nozzle
and reinforcement as shown on Fig .1.
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬Ø ≤ 8" ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬1 ‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬.: 6.2 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎزل و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬
6.3. For all nozzles 8"< Ø ≤18" two thermocouples shall be installed on each
nozzle and reinforcement as shown on Fig.2.
‫ دو ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎزل و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬8"< Ø ≤18" ‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي‬: 6.3 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬2 ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﺷﻜﻞ‬
6.4. Three thermocouples shall be installed for each nozzle and nozzle
reinforcement for 18"< Ø ≤ 22", refer to Fig.3.
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬18" < Ø ≤ 22" ‫ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎزل و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺎزل ﺑﺮاي‬: 6.4 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
6.5. Four thermocouples shall be installed for each nozzle and nozzle
reinforcement for 22"< Ø ≤ 36", refer to Fig.4.
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬22" < Ø ≤ 36" ‫ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎزل و ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺎزل ﺑﺮاي‬: 6.5 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
101
‫‪6.6. For all parts longer than one meter, if any exist, thermocouples shall be used‬‬
‫‪in interval of one meter.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 6.6‬ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮي‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2,24‬ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺣﺮارت دﻫﻲ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ، Heating‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ‪ Holding‬و‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Cooling‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ رﻛﻮردر ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺎت ﺑﺮ روي ﮔﺮاف ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫‪5.7.4.6 The thermal stress relief procedure shall be as outlined in the following:‬‬
‫‪a) The temperature of the furnace shall not exceed 425 °C (800 °F) at the time the part or‬‬
‫‪section of the tank is placed in it.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻓﻮق ﺗﺎ دﻣﺎي ‪ 425‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮔﺮاف آن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ اﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺛﺒﺖ دﻣﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ از دﻣﺎي ‪ 300‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫روش ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺛﺒﺖ ﮔﺮاف در ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎز ﺳﻮز ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ زﻳﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺎﺣﺼﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﮔﺮاف ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﻳﻲ از ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮاد ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻛﻮردر )ﺛﺒﺎت( در ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺛﺒﺖ دﻣﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪103‬‬
١٠٤
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ از ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ رﻧﮕﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻛﺮده‬
‫اﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ اﻓﺮادي ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ را ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ رﻧﮓ را‬
‫ﭘﺎس ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ اﺻﻄﻼح ﻛﻮر رﻧﮓ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻋﺪد درون ﻛﺎدر را ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮر ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﺎً ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮر رﻧﮕﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻋﺪد درون ﻛﺎدر ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ رﻧﮕﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ و ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫در اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ رﺳﻢ ﮔﺮاف دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺳـﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺘـﺪاول ‪ 25‬و ‪ 40‬و ﻳـﺎ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻛﻪ در ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 25‬و ‪ 40‬و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﮔﺮاف رﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪Heating Rate‬‬

‫ﭼﻮن ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ داراي ﻳﻚ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ در ﻣﺤﺪودهي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ از دﻣﺎي ‪ 300‬درﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻚ رﻧﮓ را )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً اوﻟﻴﻦ رﻧﮓ( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ از ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ a‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪي ﺑﻌﺪي اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري دﻣﺎ )‪ ،(Holding Time‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻓﻘﻲ ‪ 300‬درﺟﻪ رﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ‬
‫اﻓﻘﻲ دﻣﺎي ‪ 300‬درﺟﻪ را در ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ b‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪي ﻫﺮ ‪ 100‬درﺟﻪ در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﮔﺮاﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ 10‬و ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪهي ‪ 10‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 20‬درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻪ ‪ 10‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪي ﭘﺎره ﺧﻂ ‪ 320 ab‬درﺟﻪ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎل‪ ،‬از ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ b‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ ( c‬ﺧﻄﻲ رﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪي ﭘﺎره ﺧﻂ ‪ bc‬را اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ 61‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮق ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ اﻟﺰاوﻳﻪ ‪ abc‬دارﻳﻢ و ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ]‪[(ab/bc) × Equipment Speed‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ‪ Heating Rate‬را ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻋﺪاد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد دﻣﺎي‪ 131‬درﺟﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد و ﭼﻮن ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي ‪ Heating Rate‬ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ 220‬درﺟﻪ در ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ دﻣﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪Holding Time‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ Holding Time‬زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر از ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ a‬ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ b‬ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاف ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪي ‪ Cooling Rate‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮق اﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪30‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ]‪ [(da × 60)/Equipment Speed‬دارﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫]‪ [(30 × 60)/25 = 72Min.‬زﻣﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ 72‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﻋﺪد ‪ 60‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪه دﻗﺎﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اﺳﺖ(‬
‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪Cooling Rate‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪ Cooling Rate‬دﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪ Heating Rate‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ d‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪي ﺑﻌﺪي ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ Cooling Rate‬اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻋﻤﻮد ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻓﻘﻲ ‪ 300‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ اﻓﻘﻲ دﻣﺎي ‪ 300‬درﺟﻪ را در ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ b‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮق‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪي ﭘﺎره ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ 320 db‬درﺟﻪ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎل‪ ،‬از ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ b‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪي ‪ ( e‬ﺧﻄﻲ رﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪي ﭘﺎره ﺧﻂ ‪ be‬را اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ 49‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮق ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺰاوﻳﻪ ‪ dbe‬دارﻳﻢ و ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﻮل ]‪ [(db/be) × Equipment Speed‬ﻣﻴﺰان ‪ Cooling Rate‬را ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻋﺪاد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد دﻣﺎي‪ 163‬درﺟﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪ -‬ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮد‬

‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650-2020‬اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻠﻬﺎ را در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Holding Time‬ﺣﺪود ‪85‬‬
‫درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﻣﺎ و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﻣﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 85‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ 5.7.4.6 (c‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪5.7.4.6 (c) During the heating period, the temperature throughout the portion of the‬‬
‫‪tank being heated shall not vary more than 140 °C (250 °F) within any 4.6 m (15‬‬
‫‪ft) interval of length and, when at the hold temperature, not more than 85 °C (150‬‬
‫‪°F) throughout the portion of the tank being heated.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﺮدود ﺷﺪن ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاف ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻫﻤﻴﻦ اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ در ﻣﺤﺪودهي ‪ Holding Time‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫ﻣﻮرد دﻳﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮدود ﺷﺪن ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ، Heating Rate‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و رﻓﻊ اﺷﻜﺎل آن ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺮدود اﻋﻼم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻜﻲ در‬
‫روﻧﺪ ﭘﺮوﺳﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺧﻠﻠﻲ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮرد دﻳﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮدود ﺷﺪن ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ، Cooling Rate‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و رﻓﻊ اﺷﻜﺎل آن ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮن ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪي ﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪي ‪ Cooling Rate‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺮ اﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪم ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮدود اﻋﻼم ﮔﺮدد و ﻣﺠﺪداً اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫اﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎت ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ رخ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ در اﻳﻦ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫راﻫﻜﺎري ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﻪ ﻳﺎ اﺻﻼح ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﭘﻴﺶ آﻣﺪه ﻧﻪ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ و ﻧﻪ‬
‫در اﻛﺜﺮ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ آن اﺷﺎره ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ و ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ راﻫﻜﺎر اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع را از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ ENI‬اﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و‬
‫در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮده ام ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﻮر ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ‪ Piping‬اﺳﺖ اﻣﺎ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎت‬
‫رخ داده ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ رخ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ و ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ راﻫﻜﺎر اﺟﺮاﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ آن ﻧﮕﺎه ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫■‪ -‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ‪ PWHT‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.11‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ‪ PWHT‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.11.1‬رﺧﺪاد ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ در ﻃﻮل دوره ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪(Incident During Heating Period‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪداً راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )از دﻣﺎي واﻗﻌﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ( در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺎده ‪ . 5,3‬ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در رﻛﻮرد ‪ PWHT‬ﮔﺰارش ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.11.2‬رﺧﺪاد ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ در ﻃﻮل دوره ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري )‪(Incident During Holding Period‬‬
‫)در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ( دو ﻣﻮرد وﺟﻮد دارد )در ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ NCR‬ﺷﺮوع ﺷﻮد(‬
‫ﮔﺰارش ﻋﺪم اﻧﻄﺒﺎق →‪NCR: Non-Conformance Report ---------‬‬
‫●‪ -‬رﺧﺪاد ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮم اول زﻣﺎن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‪(1/3 of the holding time) :‬‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت و ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ از دﻣﺎي واﻗﻌﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻫﻤﺎن اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺎده ‪ 5,2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬رﺧﺪاد ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮم اول زﻣﺎن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‪(after the 1/3 of the holding time) :‬‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت و ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ از دﻣﺎي واﻗﻌﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺪداً راه اﻧﺪازي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻫﻤﺎن اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺎده ‪ 5,2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎي زﻣﺎن ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮف‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻣﺮدود ﺷﺪن ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﺷﻜﺎل در ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪي ‪ Cooling Rate‬در ﻛُﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺧﺎﺻﻲ دﻳﺪه ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ وﻟﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﭘﺮوژه )‪ (Spec‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Eni‬اﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻮرژﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻮرت ﺷﺪه و آﻧﻬﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع را از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ داﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎل ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.11.3‬رﺧﺪاد ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ در ﻃﻮل دوره ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ )‪(Incident During Cooling Period‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ‪ 300 ºC‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﺧﻼل ﻳﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪم‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻧﺮخ ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪن ﮔﺮدد ﺗﻤﺎم ﭘﺮوﺳﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ)‪ (PWHT‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺪداً اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭼﺎرت اﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫)ﭼﺎرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮدود اﻋﻼم ﮔﺮدﻳﺪه( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎرت ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﻮد و ﮔﺰارش ﻛﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪ -2,25‬ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ )‪(Temporary Furnace‬‬

‫ﻛﻮره ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ و ﺗﻨﺶ ﮔﻴﺮي‪ :‬در ﻣﻮاردي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻮره ﻣﻮﻗﺖ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر و اﺟﺮاي‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ از ﻟﺤﺎظ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺎزه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ و اﻟﻤﺎن‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺼﺮف و ﺗﻌﺪاد آن ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺎر در ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ از ﺣﺪي ﺧﺎص ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻮره ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﻳﻜﺴﺎن وﺟﻮد دارد و ﻳﺎ آﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار زﻳﺎدي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺗﻨﺶ ﮔﻴﺮي وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮز در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺮدﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه در ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪111‬‬
١١٢
‫‪ -2,26‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫در ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اوﻗﺎت اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ Flush-type cleanout fitting‬و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ Flush-type shell connection‬در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد آﻧﻬﻢ در واﻗﻊ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎزن ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ API-650‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.7.4.2‬و ‪ 5.7.4.3‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ دﻗﻴﻘﺎً از ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫از ﻧﺼﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺮوه ‪Fabrication Manufacturer‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ارﺳﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺪون اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ارﺳﺎل ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﮔﺮوه ‪Erection Manufacturer‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ اراﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ اﺟﺮاﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ در ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪:‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬اراﺋﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮاﺳﻴﻮن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه رﻛﻮردر )ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ(‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮارد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮع دﺳﺘﮕﺎه و ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎي آن )ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ اﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻣﺎ و زﻣﺎن ‪ Holding‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻧﺮخ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ (Heating Rate‬در ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻧﺮخ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ )‪ (Cooling Rate‬در ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮع ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮع ﺧﻤﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ روي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮع ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده )ﭘﺸﻢ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺸﻢ ﺳﻨﮓ(‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮع دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮارت‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮع ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻠﻬﺎ و اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺮب‬
‫●‪ -‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ و ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪاﺗﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﺎر ﺑﻨﺪي‬
‫ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺑﺰرگ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ اﺛﺮ دﻣﺎي ﺟﻮش و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ دﻣﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ دﭼﺎر ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ و‬
‫اﻋﻮﺟﺎج )‪ (Distortion‬ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
115
١١٦
117
١١٨
‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﺪﻫﺎي اﻟﻤﻨﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.7.4.3‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي‬
‫ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ از ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ”‪ 2‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﮔﺮوه ‪ IV, IVA, V, or VI,‬ﺟﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ 3‬و ”‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺪﻫﺎي ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻣﺮوزه ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻪ اﺻﻄﻼح ﻣﺎري و ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎم ﺗﺠﺎري ‪Flexible‬‬
‫‪ induction heating coil‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪121‬‬
١٢٢
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮش ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮش ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﺎ اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮش ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎً ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ از‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻮش ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ روش ﻓﻮق اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‪ :‬در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650 PARAGRAPH 5.7.4.4‬در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ آﻣﺪه‪:‬‬
‫■ ‪-‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ Flush-type‬ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻬﻮﻟﻬﺎ و ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮع ‪ flush-type‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در‬
‫ﻣﻮرد ﺟﻮش ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ورق ﺟﺎ داده ﺷﺪه )در ورق ﺑﺪﻧﻪ( ﻳﺎ ورق ﺟﺎ داده ﺷﺪه ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ورق ﻛﻒ اﻧﻮﻻر‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫)‪ (Annular‬اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼوه ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎز ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎي ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﺎزل و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﻮل ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮآورده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ – (a‬ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎي ﺧﺎرج از ورق ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ )ورﻗﻬﺎي ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎ( )ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫‪ 5.7.2.4‬ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ - (b‬اﺑﻌﺎد ﺟﻮش ﮔﻠﻮﻳﻲ ‪ Fillet‬در ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﻮع ‪ Slip-on‬از ‪ 16 mm‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺟﻮش ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺐ‬
‫)‪ (Butt‬در ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﮔﺮدن ﺟﻮش )‪ (Welding neck‬از ‪ 19 mm‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل در ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ )‪ 90 ºC (200 ºF‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﺷﻮد ﻣﺤﺪودهي ‪ 16 mm‬و ‪ 19 mm‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 32 mm‬و ‪ 40 mm‬اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻓﻮق ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ داده ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮش ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪125‬‬
‫‪ -2,27‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ‬
‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650‬اﻟﺰاﻣﻲ در ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻣﺎ در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.3.3‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﺰام ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ از ﻃﺮف ﻣﺸﺘﺮي‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.3.3‬ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫● ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻮرژي وﻳﮋه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮاد و ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ را ﻛﻪ در‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺮك ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ وﻳﮋه در‬
‫ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻒ )ﻣﺨﺰن(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد و اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺨﺰن و‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و ﺳﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﺮك ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را‬
‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺤﺘﻮاي ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﻓﻠﺰات ﭘﺎﻳﻪ و ﺟﻮش و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ روش ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ورق و‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن در ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪ .‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺟﻮش ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮ از ﺣﺮارت‪ ،‬در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮ از ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺠﺎور اﻏﻠﺐ داراي ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 22‬راﻛﻮل ﺳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫و ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﻈﺎر داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش ﻧﺸﺪه ﺣﺴﺎس ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار و ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﻣﻮرد اﻧﺘﻈﺎر در ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‪،‬‬
‫اﺣﺘﻤﺎل وﺟﻮد رﻃﻮﺑﺖ در ﺳﻄﺢ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻠﺰ ‪ ،‬و وﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎي ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ و ﺳﺨﺘﻲ از ﻓﻠﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ و ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.3.4‬در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺟﻮش ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.3.4‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺟﻮش‬
‫اﻟﻒ( ﺳﺨﺘﻲﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﺎﺛﺮ از ﺣﺮارت )‪ (HAZ‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ‪ H2S‬ﻛﻪ در ﺑﺮﮔﻪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ‪ ،5‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ب( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در ﮔﺮوه‪ ،V ،IVA ، IV‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ VI‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ دو روش زﻳﺮ ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪ (1‬آزﻣﺎﻳﺶﻫﺎي ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺖ روش ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﻮشﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶﻫﺎي ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش‬
‫و ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮ از ﺣﺮارت )‪ (HAZ‬ورق ﻣﻮرد آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬روش ﻫﺎي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار و ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﺟﻮش ﻫﺎي رﺳﻮب ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺧﻼف آن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮش ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻳﻚ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪100‬‬
‫ﻓﻮت( ﺟﻮش ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻳﻚ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬روش ﻫﺎي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪار و ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ؛ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاﻓﻬﺎي ﻓﻮق ﻫﻴﭻ اﺷﺎره اﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺸﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎه ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺴﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫آﻣﻴﻦ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻟﺰاﻣﺎت اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE SP0403‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻮد‪ .‬در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 3.6‬اﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪3.6 Field fabricated API 650 caustic tanks are typically impractical to PWHT.‬‬
‫‪Therefore, care should be taken in the tank design to ensure the inlet nozzle design‬‬
‫‪prevents hot caustic from being in contact with the shell of the tank, which could‬‬
‫]‪cause caustic SCC. [(SCC) = Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 3.6‬ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺳﻮد ﺳﻮزآور )ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاﺳﺎس اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 650‬در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮاي ‪ PWHT‬ﻏﻴﺮﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﻧﺎزل ورودي ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ از ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻮد ﺳﻮزآور )ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ( داغ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬زﻳﺮا ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد )ﺗﺮك( ‪ SCC‬ﺳﻮد ﺳﻮزآور )ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ( ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪3.7 Organic or inorganic linings may be applied as a barrier against caustic SCC.‬‬
‫‪Care should be taken to select a suitable coating that performs acceptably in the‬‬
‫‪process environment and during shutdown operations, such as depressurizing and‬‬
‫‪steamout. The coating must resist the maximum temperature exposures. Quality‬‬
‫‪assurance of the coating installation is‬‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫‪essential to provide the required initial level of protection. Periodic inspection and‬‬
‫‪maintenance of the coating should be performed over the life of the equipment and‬‬
‫‪piping to ensure continuing protection.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 3.7‬آﺳﺘﺮﻫﺎي )‪ (linings‬آﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺸﻲ ‪ SCC‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮل ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ و در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ )‪ (Shutdown Operations‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر و ﺑﺨﺎر )‪ (steamout‬داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد از ﺧﻮد ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‪ ،‬ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري دوره اي ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﻮل ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺪاوم اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺸﻲ ‪ SCC‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮل‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت آﺳﺘﺮ ﮔﺬاري )‪ (Rubber Lining‬اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫در واﻗﻊ اﻋﻤﺎل آﺳﺘﺮ ﮔﺬاري )‪ (Rubber Lining‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎل ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ آﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫در واﻗﻊ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن را در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺸﻲ ‪ SCC‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮل ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﻘﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل را ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ اﻟﺰاﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE SP0403‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻣﺎ در ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺟﻊ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE SP0472‬اﺷﺎره ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ آﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-945‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻮد‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE SP0472‬اﺳﺘﻨﺎد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.2‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.2.1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از روش ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ در ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ در واﺣﺪﻫﺎي آﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﻄﻮح ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺟﻮش و اﻋﻤﺎل ‪ PWHT‬اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
‫رﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ و ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻮش ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻼت‬
‫ﺗﺮك ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﻳﻦ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ داﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﻮش ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫‪ API RP 582‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.2.2‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮش‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺟﻮش در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻓﻮﻻد ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ‪ SSC‬را اﻳﺠﺎد‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ NACE RP0472‬اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻲ و اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺮك را ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﻠﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻮش و ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺟﻮش ﺑﺮاي دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮش ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ‪ NACE RP0472‬ﺑﻴﺎن ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺟﻮش ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻓﻮﻻد ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ‪ ،‬از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻛﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫از ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ ‪ 200‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺎ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺖ ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎل‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 200‬ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ در رﺳﻮب ﺟﻮش ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ازﺗﺮك ‪ SSC‬در ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﺎﺛﺮ از ﺣﺮارت ﺟﻮش ‪ ،HAZ‬ﻳﺎ در ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻛﻪ در آن اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻗﻮس )‪ (Arc Strikes‬اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬اراﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز در ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻴﻚ )‪(Caustic‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ آﻣﻴﻦ )‪ (Amine‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ‪ PWHT‬دارﻧﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪ 200‬ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪129‬‬
‫ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬-2,28

‫ ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ در دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬.‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺧﻮد را ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺴﺖ‬.‫ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه اﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﭘﺲ از اﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬.‫ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺣﺎﻛﻲ از ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺳﻨﺠﻲ از دﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
8- HARDNESS TEST PROCEDURE
This procedure describes the method & the technique which are to be used for
execution Brinell Hardness test on weld during production according to the ASTM
E10 & NACE SP0472 on the Storage tanks which fabricated at site.
‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬: 8 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬

‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ روش ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻲ را ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺮاي ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ روي ﺟﻮش در ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ در ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﻣﺤﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ‬NACE SP0472 ‫ و‬ASTM E10 ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
8.1. Examination:
8.1 .1. Testing Machine:
Portable equipment shall be used for hardness testing. (Device and model number
will be specified In report). Equipment for Brinell hardness testing usually consists
of a testing machine which Supports the test specimen and applies an indenting
force to a ball in contact with the specimen.
The design of testing machine shall insure that the force the indenter (Brinell ball)
shall be applied smoothly and without impact force. To calibrate the testing
machine see manual manufacture is Instruction test machine and ASTM E10.
‫ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬: 8.1 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬

‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﺴﺖ‬: 8.1.1 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
(.‫ )ﺷﻤﺎره دﺳﺘﮕﺎه و ﻣﺪل در ﮔﺰارش ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً از ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ را ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﺮورﻓﺘﮕﻲ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﺮورﻓﺘﮕﻲ )ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ و ﺑﺪون ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
ASTM E10 ‫ ﺑﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه و‬،‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻟﻴﺒﺮه ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﺴﺖ‬.‫اﻋﻤﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
8.2- Evaluation of Indentation
8.2.1- When indentation is made on a curved surface, the minimum radius of
curvature of the surface shall not be less than 2% times the diameter of the ball.
The measurement of the Indentation shall be taken as the mean of the major and
minor axes ("d" in Fig.4) . A number which is proportional to the quotient,
١٣٠
obtained by dividing the test force by the curved area of the indention which is
assumed to be spherical.
‫ ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬: 8.2 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎع اﻧﺤﻨﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﻲ روي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬: 8.2.1 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
‫ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻮرﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬.‫ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬%2 ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ از ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺮوي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻓﺮورﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺮوي ﻓﺮض ﻣﻲ‬.‫( در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬4 ‫" در ﺷﻜﻞ‬d" )
.‫ ﻋﺪدي ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ آﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺿﺮب ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
8.3. Examination
8.3.1. The Brinell hardness test shall be performed when applicable after PWHT
on the weld.
8.3.2. The position subject of examination shall be prepared through smooth
grinding area with Dimension min. 30x30 mm including center of weld and heat
affected zone.
8.3.3. Weld deposits shall be hardness tested, where required, on the side
contacted by the Process whenever possible. If access to the process side is
impractical, such as on small diameter Nozzles, hardness testing shall be done on
the opposite side.
8.3.4. For storage tank butt welds where hardness testing is required, a minimum
of one hardness Test should be made for each 3m of weld seam. In addition, one
hardness test shall be made on each nozzle flange-to-neck and nozzle neck-to
shell/roof weld. Each unique welding Procedure used shall be hardness tested.
8.3.5. The measured values of hardness shall not exceed 200 HB.
‫ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬: 8.3 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬

.‫ روي ﺟﻮش اﺟﺮا ﺷﻮد‬PWHT ‫ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻨﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ از‬: 8.3.1 ‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف‬
131
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 8.3.2‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻨﮓ زﻧﻲ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺻﺎف ﺑﺎ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ 30x30‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﻮش و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮارت اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 8.3.3‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‪ ،‬رﺳﻮﺑﺎت ﺟﻮش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ آن ﺗﻤﺎس دارد‪ ،‬آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎزل ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻃﺮف‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 8.3.4‬ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻮش ﻫﺎي ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺐ ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﺮ درز‬
‫ﺟﻮش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮش ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‪/‬ﺳﻘﻒ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ روش ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮد ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 8.3.5‬ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ‪ HB 200‬ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم‬-3
PWHT
Procedure
for
Storage Tank
133
"‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ"اﻟﺤﺪاده‬:‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اول‬-■

SAMPLE: 1
POST WELD HEAT Procedure: 7-8-00 / JZ-

TREATMENT 777
The Company with the Strength of
Steel
Date : A / 26 11 2020
(STORAGE TANKS) Rev : 001
PROCEDURE FOR POST WELD HEAT

TREATMENT
OF STORAGE TANKS
PROCEDURE NO. :
STORAGE TANK NUMBER:
Prepare
By Reviewed Approved
Revision Welding By: QC By: QC
Rev. Date Description Engineer Superintend Manager
١٣٤
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
----- Cover Page 1
----- Table of Content 2
1- Scope 3
2- References 3
3- General Requirements 3
4- Heating System 3
5- Temperature Control 4
6- Thermocouples & Thermocouple Extension 4
7- Thermocouple Positions 5
8- Temperature Record 5
9- Procedure 5
10- Documentation & Records 8
135
1 Scope
1.1 This procedure describes all the requirements for Post Weld Heat Treatment
of shell / re-pad and cleanout door assembly of Storage tanks in a furnace as
per API 650 & API 620.
2 References
2.1 API 650 11th Edition (2020).

2.2 API 620 11th Edition (2018).
2.3 Applicable Welding Package (WPS, PQR).
3 General Requirements
3.1 Before applying the detailed requirements, satisfactory weld procedure

qualifications of the procedures to be used shall be performed in accordance
with all the essential variables of ASME section IX including conditions of
post weld heat treatment or lack of post weld heat treatment.
3.2 Prior to the start of PWHT, components shall be checked to ensure that all
restraints are removed, the component is free to expand and contract and
suitable and sufficient support are used.
3.3 All machined surface, such as flanges faces, threaded bolts holes, threads, etc.
Shall be protected from oxidation during the heat treatment by coating with
de-oxaluminite or other suitable material.
3.4 All PWHT chart records shall be submitted to Welding Engineer for
review and approval.
3.5 Suitably trained Personnel shall be employed for operation of PWHT furnace.
4 Heating System
4.1 The Specification of PWHT Furnace as follows

●- Furnace type: Transport loading type [W(6) × H(7.5) × L(25) Meter]
●- Loading Capacity: 300Ton/Charge Max.
●- Maximum Operation Temperature: 750ºC (Normal: 700ºC)
●- Combustion method: Diesel Burner (Ignition LPG)
●- Ignition system: LPG high voltage discharge ignited by the Flame
●- Main Fuel: Diesel
●- Burner Quantity: 8 set
●- Burner Capacity: 1000000 Kcal/h/set
●- Electricity: 380V 3P 60Hz
●- Blower: Motor: 11KW 3P × 8 set
●- Air Pressure & Air Flow: 700mmAq & 35CMM
●- Local control Panel & Main Control Panel
١٣٦
5 Temperature Control
5.1 There are eight locals Control Panel in the furnace for the burner control. The
Local Control Panel to drive the burner control unit as fundamental from air
pressure control ignition, fuel valve control etc.
5.2 The burners shall be adjusted manually, by continuous reference to the

temperature recording instrument, adjusting fuel and airflow in a manner
such as to ensure that parameters and constraints of the specification are fully
met, to achieve a heating balance throughout the assembly.
5.3 The location of thermocouples describes in Section 7 of this procedure, shall

be determined so as to provide a good indication of the overall distribution of
heat throughout the assembly, any discrepancy shall be investigated.
5.4 The actual temperature range for the soak period, as recorded by
thermocouples, shall not have a spread of more than 40°C.
6 Thermocouples & Thermocouple Extension
6.1 Thermocouples shall be Type K (Chromel-Alumel) or Type J (iron

Constantan).
6.2 Thermocouples shall be attached to the workpiece by the direct wire

capacitance discharge welding method.
6.3 All extension cables, compensating cables, and jumper cables in the
measurement or control circuits shall be the specified thermocouple wire or
the matching extension wire.
6.4 The thermocouple to compensation lead connection shall be a minimum of

0.5m from the heated zone, and that the temperature at the junction is to be in
the range of 0-80°C.
7 Thermocouple Position
7.1 Thermocouple shall be located on the nozzle to shell / pad assembly surface
to ensure that all positions are properly and uniformly heated. The
thermocouple locations shall include:
a- The thinnest major component
b- The thickest member.
7.2 Sufficient thermocouples must be used to ensure that the welds and heat
137
affected zones achieve the uniform temperatures.
8 Temperature Recording
8.1 Thermocouples and a calibrated temperature chart recorder shall be used to

provide an accurate and legible record of all PWHTs. All charts shall be
marked with the date and sufficient information to uniquely identify the
vessel (or joint/component for localized PWHT) being heat treated.
Multipoint chart recorders shall clearly differentiate/identify each
channel/point by use of different colored inks or automatic number stamping.
8.2 Temperature recorders shall be calibrated every three months and a current
calibration sticker shall be maintained on the recorder. The calibration
frequency may be extended to 12 months with the approval of Saudi Aramco
Inspection if the documented calibration checks for that particular recorder
demonstrate acceptable accuracy for a suitable period.
9 Procedure
9.1 API 650-2020- Storage Tanks
9.1.1 All flush-type cleanout fittings and flush-type shell connections shall be
thermally stress-relieved as an assembly prior to installation in the tank shell
or, alternatively, after installation into the tank shell if the entire tank is
stress-relieved. The stress relief shall be carried out within a temperature
range of 600 °C to 650 °C (1100 °F to 1200 °F) for 1 hour per 25 mm (1 in.)
of shell thickness. The assembly shall include the bottom reinforcing plate
(or annular plate) and the flange-to-neck weld.
9.1.2 For non-flush-type nozzles and manways, when the shell material is Group
I, II, III, or IIIA, all openings NPS 12 or larger in nominal diameter in a
shell plate, insert plate, or thickened insert plate more than 25 mm (1 in.)
thick shall be prefabricated into the shell plate, insert plate, or thickened
insert plate, and the prefabricated assembly shall be thermally stress-
relieved within a temperature range of 600 °C to 650 °C (1100 °F to 1200
°F) for 1 hour per 25 mm (1 in.) of thickness prior to installation.
9.1.3 For non-flush-type nozzles and manways, when the shell material is Group
IV, IVA, V, or VI, all openings larger than NPS 2 in. nominal diameter in a
shell plate, insert plate, or thickened insert plate more than 13 mm (1/2 in.)
thick shall be prefabricated into the shell plate, insert plate, or thickened
insert plate, and the prefabricated assembly shall be thermally stress relieved
١٣٨
within a temperature range of 600 °C to 650 °C (1100 °F to 1200 °F) for 1

hour per 25 mm (1 in.) of thickness prior to installation.
9.1.4 For non-flush-type nozzles and manways, the stress-relieving requirements

do not apply to the weld of the shell, insert plate, or thickened insert plate to
the bottom annular plate. Further, the stress-relieving requirements need not
include the flange-to-neck welds or other nozzle-neck and manhole-neck
attachments, provided the following conditions are satisfied:
a) The welds are outside the reinforcement.
b) The throat dimension of a fillet weld in a slip-on flange does not exceed
16 mm (5/8 in.), or the butt joint of a welding-neck flange does not exceed
19 mm (3/4 in.). If the material is preheated to a minimum temperature of 90
°C (200 °F) during welding, the weld limits of 16 mm (5/8 in.) and 19 mm
(3/4 in.) may be increase to 32 mm and 40 mm (11/4 in. and 11/2 in.),
respectively.
9.1.5 When openings are installed in quenched and tempered material, the
maximum thermal stress-relieving temperature shall not exceed the
tempering temperature for materials in the prefabricated stress-relieving
assembly.
9.1.6 The thermal stress relief procedure shall be as outlined in the following:
a) The temperature of the furnace shall not exceed 425 °C (800 °F) at the
time the part or section of the tank is placed in it.
b) The rate of heating above 425 °C (800 °F) shall be not more than 220 °C
(400 °F) per hour divided by the maximum metal thickness, in inches, of
the wall plate being heated, but in no case shall it be more than 220 °C (400
°F) per hour.
c) During the heating period, the temperature throughout the portion of the
tank being heated shall not vary more than 140 °C (250 °F) within any 4.6
m (15 ft) interval of length and, when at the hold temperature, not more
than 85 °C (150 °F) throughout the portion of the tank being heated. A
minimum temperature of 595 °C (1100 °F) shall be maintained for a period
of one hour per inch of metal thickness (maximum metal thickness of the
tank wall plates affected). During the heating and holding periods, the
furnace atmosphere shall be controlled to avoid excessive oxidation of the
surface of the material being treated. The furnace shall be designed to
prevent direct impingement of the flame on the material.
d) At temperatures over 425 °C (800 °F), cooling shall be done in a closed
furnace or cooling chamber at a rate not greater than 280 °C (500 °F) per
hour divided by the maximum metal thickness, in inches, of the plates
affected, but in no case shall the rate be more than 280 °C (500 °F) per
hour. At temperatures below 425 °C (800 °F), the material may be cooled
139
in still air.
9.1.7 When it is impractical to stress relieve at a minimum temperature of 600 °C

(1100 °F), it is permissible, subject to the Purchaser’s agreement, to carry
out the stress-relieving operation at lower temperatures for longer periods
of time in accordance with the tabulation below. The lower temperature
/longer time PWHT may not provide material toughness and residual
stresses equivalent to that using the higher temperature/shorter time PWHT;
therefore, a review by a knowledgeable metallurgist and possible
verification by mill testing of heat-treated coupons and/or testing of welded
plates shall be considered.
9.1.8 During the heating and holding periods, the furnace atmosphere shall be so
controlled as to avoid excessive oxidation of the surface of the material
being treated. The furnace shall be of such design as to prevent direct
impingement of the flame on the material.
9.1.9 The rates of heating and cooling need not be less than 100 °F/hr (55°C/h).
However, in all cases consideration of closed chambers and complex
structures may indicate reduced rates of heating and cooling to avoid
structural damage due to excessive thermal gradients.
9.2 API 620-2018 – Storage tanks
9.2.1 Wall Thickness

Tank sections that have a nominal thickness of wall plate greater than 11/4
in. at any nozzle or other welded attachment and nozzle necks whose
thickness at any welded joint therein exceeds (D + 50)/120 shall be
thermally stress relieved after welding. For P-1 materials, the 11/4 in.
thickness may be increased to 1 1/2 in., provided that a minimum preheat
temperature of 200 °F is maintained during welding. Thickness of
compression rings not considered in the determination of thermal stress
١٤٠
relief requirements. In this formula diameters less than 20 in. shall be

assumed to be 20 in. When thermal stress relief cannot be applied to welded
assemblies of these parts after erection, all such assemblies, particularly
around openings and support attachments, shall be made in the shop and
shall be thermally stress relieved before shipment.
10 Documentation & Records
10.1 The documentation information will comprise of the following:

●- Approval of relevant heat treatment procedure and / or specification, and
chart recording receipt.
●- Heat Treatment Data sheet (Details of thermocouple layout &
traceability to the recording chart).
●- Temperature chart, fully identified and referenced. The chart shall also
identify the heat treatment specification, chart speed, date of operation,
job and component number.
●- Recorder Test Certificate and Thermocouples conformation.
141
TK1001A‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‬:‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ دوم‬-■

SAMPLE: 2
Owner: Contractor:
Plant Name:
Project Name:
MC: Heat treatment and Hardness test
Procedures for site
Erected Storage Tank
TK-1001A
Owner Document No.: Date:
Rev:
Contractor Document No.: 29-11-2021
Heat treatment and Hardness test

Procedures
For site Erected Storage Tank
TK-1001A
A2
A1
REV DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED
١٤٢
Table of Contents
1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................... 3
2. DEFINITION OF CONTRACTING PARTIES ................................................ 3
3. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARD ..................................................... 3
4. GENERAL SPECIFICATION ........................................................................... 3
5. POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT REQIDREMENT ................................... 3
6. HEATING /COOLING RATE AND TEMPERATURE. .................................. 4
7. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................... 4
8. HEAT TREATMENT EQIDPMENT ................................................................ 5
9. SITE POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT ........................................................ 5
10. TEMPERATURE RECORDING & MEASURING ........................................ 7
11. SITE ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES ..................................................................... 8
12. INSPECTION AFTER PWHT ......................................................................... 8
13. NOZZLE AND MANHOLE TO BE PWHT: ..…………………………….... 8
14. HARDNESS TEST ........................................................................................... 8
15. DOCUMENTATION: ...................................................................................... 9
16. POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT SCHEMATIC CHART ……….…..... 10
17. EXECUTION PROCEDURE FOR PWHT .................................................... 10
18. REPORT ......................................................................................................... 16
143
1. SCOPE
This procedure is applied to the PWHT at field for storage TK-1001A
2. DEFINITION OF CONTRACTING PARTIES

• OWNER/CLIENT ----------------------------------- COMPANY
• Managing Contractor -------------------------------- Company
• EPC contractor ----------------------------by the OWNER to develop the
--------------------------- Tanks Project, or its authorized representative.
• CONTRACTOR, The named party with whom the COMPANY places a
contract.
• VENDOR The manufacturer and/or supplier of a commodity, system or
Piece of equipment to perform the specified duty.
• TPA/INSPECTOR --------------- Representative of the COMPANY or any
organization authorized by the COMPANY to perform inspection of the
items being manufactured or supplied.
3. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARD

• API 650, Edition 2020
• ASME Sec. VIII Div. l Ed. 2021
• AWS D10.10-2009
4. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
• Nozzle with reinforced Pad or Insert Plate type.
• Shell material: SA-516 Gr.70
• Material group: V (Material group have been specified in table 4.4b of API
650-2020.)
5. POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENT

PWTH shall apply under following condition:
• The PWHT shall perform in the site by locally heating of parts to be heat
treated.
• All opening connections requiring reinforcement in a shell plate or
thickened insert plate more than 13 mm thick shall be prefabricated into
the shell plate or thickened insert plate, and the prefabricated as simply
shall be thermally stress relieved prior installation.
• The surface of parts to be heat treated shall be checked visually against the
discontinuity and contaminants such as: grease, paint, etc. on the welds.
Machined surface of flanges etc. to be properly protected.
• Make sure that all inspection and NDT has been performed and accepted
before starting PWHT.
• In case of local heat treatment, the thermo couple shall be mechanically
attached to the parts being heat treated within 40 mm from outside surface
of weld metal.
١٤٤
• The number and position of the thermo couples shall be in accordance with
the below table:
Pipe size (NPS) Minimum Number and location
Up to including 8" 1 No. Top or Bottom
Over 8" Up to including 18" 2 No. Top and Bottom
Over 18" Up to including 22" 3 No. One top and each 120° apart
Over 22" Up to including 36" 4 No. One top and each 90° apart
• The stress-relieving requirements need not include the flange-to-neck weld

or other nozzle neck and manhole neck attachments provided the following
conditions are fulfilled:
a. The welds are outside the reinforcement.
b. The throat dimension of a fillet weld in a slip-on flange does not exceed
16 mm or the butt joint of a welding neck flange does not exceed 19 mm. if
the material is preheated to a minimum temperature of 90°C, 16 mm and
19mm may be increased to 32 mm and 38 mm, respectively.
6. HEATING / COOLING RATE AND TEMPERATURE

The stress relief shall be carried out within a temperature range of 600 ºC to
650 ºC for 1 hour per 25 mm of thickness.
6.1- Heating Rate

Above 427ºC the rate of heating shall not be more than 220°Clhr. divided by
the maximum metal thickness of plate in inches, but m no case more than
220°C/hr. During the heating period there shall not be a greater variation in
temperature throughout the portion of the tank being heated than more than
140 °C within any interval recording.
6.2- Cooling Rate

Above 427°C cooling shall be done at a rate not greater than 280°C/hr
divided by the maximum metal thickness of plate in inches, but in no case
more than 280°C /hr. below 427°C the plate may be cooled in still air.
7. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

Temperature will be controlled by combination of program setter with
generate voltage (MV) equivalent to the electromotive force of thermocouple
with temperature controller. The heating rate will be controlled by power
regulator by the difference of thermal electromotive force of thermocouple.
Controlling devices shall be calibrated by an authorized party as per
manufactures instruction and the calibration record shall be submitted to
purchaser.
145
8. HEAT TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

Required and suitable heat treatment equipment shall be selected by vendor
who is Responsible for executing the post weld heat treatment. Prior to
execution, the equipment list shall be prepared by vendor and submitted to
site engineering (quality control) for review.
9. SITE POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT

9.1- Local Heat Treatment.
9.1.1- For Heat Treatment of Nozzle and Pad, it shall be used an electric
heater with ceramic material element.
9.1.2- Heating element type are used, shall be resistance heating Wire, (80%
nickel and 20% Chromium). The ceramic insulator is made from high-
density alumina powder that has been formed and then sintered at high
temperature. The heating element is selected or made up so that, when
wrapped around the weld lines, there will be a max. gap 1 inch. Element
should never be overlapped, because in this case, they will be quickly burnt
out.
9.1.3- Heat bands shall be extended to ensure stress within the weld zone,
weld heat affected zone and adjacent material are reduced to an acceptable
level. The minimum width of this volume is the widest width of weld plus 1
in, on each side or end of the weld, when bands combined from two different
thicknesses, the thicker thickness is prevailing.
9.2- Thermal Insulation
9.2.1- The heating area shall be insulated with two layers (one layer inside
and one layer outside) of high quality ceramic insulation material with 25mm
thick and 100 kg/m3 density, capable of withstanding the maximum
temperature 1200°C.
9.2.2- All heat bands shall have temperature insulation extended on either
side (inside- outside) to provide gradual thermal gradient not less than 2
(two) times the width of heat bands.
9.2.3- Insulation shall be held in position but the mild steel clamp strapping
or rapid welding of steel wire by thermocouple attachment unit.
9.2.4- Prior to the heat treatment, all gaps that exist between tower insulation
and lapping joint shall be plugged with loose insulation material (see Para.
9.2.1).
١٤٦
9.3- Interruption of Heating during Local PWHT If heating is interrupted at

any stage of the heat cycle, precautions shall be taken to minimize the
cooling rate. Subsequent heating shall be in accordance with the relevant
heat cycle.
9.3.1- Interruption in heating period: Wait until down to 427°C and go on

reheating.
9.3.2- Interruption within soak period: If the temperature drops below the
lower limitation, it shall be increased to correct range as specified heating
rate for the material and thickness, and then hold period should be restarted.
9.3.3- Interruption during cooling period: ill this case if the temperature is
within cooling rate, than acceptable, but if that is beyond, applying
additional insulation that shall be taken until the cooling rate reach to
acceptable cooling rate.
9.4- Operating of Local Post Weld Heat Treatment the operation of the local
post weld heat treatment should be generally performed in accordance with
the sequence prescribed hereafter.
9.4.1- Review the procedure of the heat treatment work and assembly
drawing.
9.4.2- Check the weld line, cleaning condition and other requirement to be
performed for post weld heat treatment.
9.4.3- Measure the skin temperature of bare parts.
9.4.4- Determination of wrapping and heating element, length and width by

consideration material type, thickness and weld length, (see Para.9.l.3)
9.4.5- Determination of heater number and type, thermocouple type,

compensate wife number position and adhesion condition,
9.4.6- The thermo couple to be welded directly on to the surface of the weld
metal by using a Capacitor Discharge type thermo couple Welding unit,
when welding a thermo couple the distance between the 2 poles shall be
within 6 mm and the attaching depth of thermo couple shall not be over 0.2 –
0.5mm.
9.4.7- Wrap the required number of heating element to the weld line.
147
9.4.8- Wrap the ceramic fibber to make thermal insulation.
9.4.9- Inspect the wrapping type, plugged points and holding method which
carried out on the weld line.
9.4.10- Confinn the calibration status (report) of temperature recorder. The

temperature recorder shall be calibrated in accordance to the fabricator
recommendation or laboratory guidance.
9.4.11- Connect the then no couple and power cables to temperature recorder
and control respectively.
9.4.12- Seal there both side when parts are opened, if practical.
9.4.13- Check the temporary supports for fill-up distortion due to the PWHT
operation and check all of the dials instruments, knobs / controller and
indicators related to the PWHT operation.
9.4.14- Monitor the heating rate, holding time and cooling rate during the
PWHT operation.
9.4.15- Check the time-temperature chart, and make a heat treatment report
in accordance with the time temperature chart.
9.4.16- Submit the report to inspector and client respectively
10. TEMPERATURE RECORDING & MEASURING
10.1- Thermocouple: "K" type thermocouple will be used. Other type is

used after approval by site engineering (quality control department). The
thermocouple wire of Ni - Cr/Ni - AI type directly welded to outer metal
surface of weld seam.
10.2- Thermocouple attachment: The welding units used for thermocouple

attachment only by melting the end of thermocouple and fix it to the object
with less thermal influence. To achieve optimum result the thermocouple
wire shall be affixed directly to the surface of the work piece.
10.3- Thermocouple shall be at suitable location.
10.4- Compensating lead cable: compensation cable between thermocouple

wire and the temperature records shall be of the copper-constant type. If
other than "K" type thermocouple is used, compatible compensation cable
١٤٨
shall be selected.
10.5- The thermocouple will be connected to a continuously monitoring

temperature recorder, thus providing temperature chart giving information on
temperature variation and tend during the various cycle.
10.6- The temperature recorder shall be adjusted for the temperature range
0 - 1200ºC or as appreciate and will be set a chart speed of 25mm (1 in.) per
hour.
10.7- The temperature recorder shall be calibrated prior to the first heat
treatment and then at interval 12 months. Calibrated report shall be made by
laboratory and one cope of these documents shall maintain in PWHT
documents.
11. SITE ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES

Regarding to site condition and equipment types, required electrical source
may vary, but in general view, the 3 phase 220/380 volt is common.
12. INSPECTION AFTER PWHT

Completed weld of stress-relieved assemblies shall be examined by visual, as
well as by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant methods, after stress relief,
but before hydrostatic test.
13. NOZZLE AND MANHOLE TO BE PWHT:
Row Opening Tag Number Description Size

1 M1 & M2 Shell Manholes 24”
2 F Feed Inlet 10”
3 B Outlet Nozzle 32”
4 D1 & d2 Drain 6”
5 R Product Return 16”
6 N1 & N2 Nitrogen For Purging 8”
14. HARDNESS TEST

Hardness tests of production welds are intended to verify satisfactory of heat
treatment. The hardness limit applies to the weld and to the heat affected
zone (HAZ) tested as close as practicable to the edge of the weld. Hardness
test procedure shall be according to ASTM El0. Hardness test instrument
with small indentation and digital display of hardness value; e.g Equotip or
smaller shall be used. Portable equipment shall be used for hardness testing.
Type and manufacturer of portable equipment shall be approved by MC's
149
inspector. Typically standard test force for an intender of 10 mm diameter is

29.42 and 14.7 KN. For another ball diameter see table 3 (ASTM El 0) and
time duration for applying full test force is 10 s to 15 s. The position subject
of examination shall be prepared through smooth grinding area with
dimension min. 30×30 mm including centre of weld and heat affected zone.
Hardness value for each type of weld shall be checked in 3 point included
weld HAZ and base metal and average of these values shall be determined
and record for compare with allowable value. The position and number of
points to be hardness tested shall be in accordance with following:
Position and No. of test point

Pipe Size NPS(mm)
Position * Position * Position *
Up to 8" 1 1 1
Exceeding 8" Up to 18" 2 (180oapart) 2 (180oapart) 2 (180oapart)
Exceeding 18" Up to 22" 3 (I 20°apart) 3 (I 20°apart) 3 (I 20°apart)
Exceeding 22" Up to 36" 4 (900 apart) 4 (900 apart) 4 (900 apart)
Notes
I . Position Legend
Position *: The circumferential weld cap (WELD)
Position *: The edge of weld-bead (Heat-affected zone) (HAZ)
Position *: The circumferential line apart from weldment edge as distance of wall
Thickness.(BASE)
2. Position * and position * shall be located in opposite side of the weld.
3. Each place should be tested three times for Equo-tip or one time for Brinell
type and average value should be recorded
Production hardness test is mandatory after heat treatment and shall be

performed on 100% of those which are locally heat treatment. Hardness
testing results shall be expressed in Brinell numbers. The hardness report
shall indicate actual hardness reading for the test method, type of hardness
tester, personnel conducting hardness tests, type of material, and calibration.
Required hardness results shall not exceed 200 HB for Caustic and Amine
service according to NACE SP0472 Table-1.
15. DOCUMENTATION:
The record and/report of PWHT result shall include following information.
l. The data where the PWHT is performed (Tank no. Date. Nozzle No.&
Size. etc)
2. Time -Temperature recorder No.
3. Number and placement of Thermocouples.
4. Heating and Cooling Rate.
5. Holding Time and Temperature.
6. Type of Heating Facilities.
7. Reports of hardness test results
١٥٠
8. Project name and Subcontractor.
16. POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT SCHEMATIC CHART
I7.EXECUTION PROCEDURE FOR PWHT
1. Scope
This procedure is applied to the PWHT at field for storage TK-1A & lB.
2. DEFINITION OF CONTRACTING PARTIES

• OWNER/CLIENT ----------------------------- COMPANY
• Managing Contractor Consultant Engineers Company
• EPC contractor .--------------------------------------.
3. Applicable Code and Standards
3.1. API Std. 650, 2020 edition.
3.2. Project Drawings.
4. General requirement for PWHT
4.1. All temporary attachments except ones for PWHT shall be removed
before the PWHT and inspected by PT.
4.2. All temperatures shall be measured on the substance.
4.3. Thermocouples shall be attached directly onto the outer surface of the
weld metal and hot junctions of thermocouples shall be heat insulated with
thermocouple putty.
4.4. The heat treatment temperature and time shall be recorded.

4.5. The heating temperature shall be controlled above 425 °C.
151
4.6. During heating or cooling period, variation in temperature throughout

the tank or component shall not exceed 140 °C with 4.6 m interval of length.
4.7. During holding period, temperature difference between any points shall
not be greater than 85 °C against specified temperature for PWHT.
4.8. The cooling temperature shall be controlled above 425 °C
4.9. After PWHT all temporary attachments for PWHT shall be removed and
inspected by PT or MT.
4.10. Completed welds of stress-relieved assemblies shall be examined by

visual, as well as by magnetic particle or penetrant methods after stress
relief, but before hydrostatic test.
5. Special requirement for PWHT
5.1. All flush-type cleanout fitting and flush-type shell connection shall be
thermally stress-relieved as an assembly prior to installation in the tank shell
.if the entire tank is stress-relieved. The stress relief shall be carried out
within a temperature range of 600 °C - 650 °C for 1 hour per 25 mm of shell
thickness. The assembly shall include the flange to neck weld.
5.2. When the shell material is Group I, II, III and IIIA, all opening
connection NPS 12 or larger in nominal diameter in a shell plate or thickened
insert plate more than 25 mm thick shall be prefabricated into the shell plate
or thickened insert plate, and the prefabricated assembly shall be thermally
stress-relieved within a temperature range of 600 °C - 650 °C for 1 hour per
25 mm of thickness prior to installation. The stress-relieving requirements
need not include the flange to neck weld or other nozzle-neck manhole-neck
attachments, provided the following conditions are fulfilled.
5.3. For non-flush-type nozzles and manways, when the shell material is
Group IV, IVA, V, or VI, all openings larger than NPS 2 in. nominal
diameter in a shell plate, insert plate, or thickened insert plate more than 13
mm thick shall be prefabricated into the shell plate, insert plate, or thickened
insert plate, and the prefabricated assembly shall be thermally stress relieved
within a temperature range of 600 °C to 650 °C for 1 hour per 25 mm of
thickness prior to installation.
5.4. For non-flush-type nozzles and manways, the stress-relieving

requirements do not apply to the weld of the shell, insert plate, or thickened
insert plate to the bottom annular plate. Further, the stress-relieving
١٥٢
requirements need not include the flange-to-neck welds or other nozzle-neck

and manhole-neck attachments, provided the following conditions are
satisfied:
5.4.1. The welds are outside the reinforcement.
5.4.2. The throat dimension of a filet weld in a slip-on flange does not
exceed 16 mm, or the butt joint of a welding-neck flange does not
exceed 19 mm. If the material is preheated to a min. temperature of 90 ºC
during welding, the weld limits of 16 mm and 19 mm may be increased to 32
mm and 38 mm respectively.
5.5. When it is impractical to stress relieve at a minimum temperature of

600 ºC, it is permissible, subject to the CLIENT agreement, to carry out the
stress –relieving operation at lower temperatures for longer periods of time
in accordance with the tabulation below. The lower temperature/longer time
PWHT may not provide material toughness and residual stresses equivalent
to that using the higher temperature/shorter time PWHT ; therefore, a review
by a knowledgeable metallurgist and possible verification by mill testing of
heat-treated coupons and/or testing of welded plates shall be considered.
Minimum Stress- Relieving Holding Time

Temperature (ºC) (hours per 25 mm of See Note
thickness)
600 1 1
570 2 1
540 4 1
510 10 1, 2
480 (Min.) 20 1, 2
NOTE 1 For intermediate temperatures, the time of heating shall be

determined by straight line interpolation.
NOTE 2 Stress relieving at these temperatures is not permitted for A537
Class 2 material.
6. Location of thermocouples
6.1. The locations of thermocouples are shown in figure 1. After finishing

the PWHT the thermocouples shall be removed by grinding and magnetic
particle inspection (MPI) shall be carried out.
6.2. For all nozzles Ø ≤ 8" one thermocouple shall be installed on each
nozzle and reinforcement as shown on Fig .1.
153
6.3. For all nozzles 8"< Ø ≤ 18" two thermocouples shall be installed on each
nozzle and reinforcement as shown on Fig.2.
6.4. Three thermocouples shall be installed for each nozzle and nozzle
reinforcement for 18"< Ø ≤ 22" refer to Fig.3.
6.5. Four thermocouples shall be installed for each nozzle and nozzle
reinforcement for 22"< Ø ≤ 36" refer to Fig.4.
6.6. For all parts longer than one meter, if any exist, thermocouples shall be
used in interval of one meter.
Flange
١٥٤
7. Condition of PWHT
7.l. Above 425 ºC, the rate of heating shall be not more than 220 ºC divided
by the maximum metal thickness of the shell or thickened insert plate in
inches, but in no case more than 220·ºC.
7.2. Above 425 ºC, cooling shall be done in a closed furnace or cooling
chamber at a rate not greater than 280 ºC divided by the maximum metal
thickness of the shell or thickened insert plate in inches, but in no case more
than 280 ºC.
7.3. Where PWHT is required by paragraph No.4; the operation of PWHT

shall be performed in accordance with the condition as shown in following
table.
PWHT Condition
Thickness Heating Holding Cooling
(mm) Rate Holding Holding Rate
(ºC/Hr) Temp. (ºC) Time (Min.) (ºC/Hr)
T ≤ 25 Max. 220 600 ~ 650 Min. 60 Max. 280
T = 35 Max. 159 600 ~ 650 Min. 85 Max. 200
T = 40 Max. 140 600 ~ 650 Min. 100 Max. 175
T = 45 Max. 120 600 ~ 650 Min. 110 Max. 155
T = 50 Max. 110 600 ~ 650 Min. 120 Max. 140
T = 55 Max. 100 600 ~ 650 Min. 135 Max. 125
T = 60 Max. 90 600 ~ 650 Min. 145 Max. 115
T = 65 Max. 80 600 ~ 650 Min. 160 Max. 105
T = 70 Max. 70 600 ~ 650 Min. 170 Max. 100
T = 75 Max. 70 600 ~ 650 Min. 180 Max. 90
T = 80 Max. 65 600 ~ 650 Min. 195 Max. 85
T = 90 Max. 60 600 ~ 650 Min. 220 Max. 75
T = 100 Max. 55 600 ~ 650 Min. 240 Max. 70
155
Graph 1: PWHT Condition for T ≤ 25
Graph 2: PWHT Condition for T = 35 mm (1.38 in.)
١٥٦
18. REPORT
157
TK3001‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‬:‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮم‬-■

SAMPLE: 3
Contractor: Owner:
Plant Name:
Project Name:
Heat treatment and Hardness test
Procedures for site
Erected Storage Tank
TK-3001
Owner Doc. No.: Rev.: 01
Contractor Doc. No.: Date: 29-11-2021
EQUIPMENT NAME:
VENDOR'S NAME:
CONTRACT NO:
01 29-11-2021 ISSUE FOR APPROVE R.A R.V H.U

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PRPD. CHKD APPD
١٥٨
POST WELD
HEAT TREATMENT
PROCEDURE
For
Site Erected
Storage Tank
TK-3001
159
Table of Contents
1. SCOPE ............................................................................................................... 4
2. DEFINITION...................................................................................................... 4
3. REFERENCES.................................................................................................... 4
4- SCHEDULING OF PWHT..................................................................................4
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS........................................................................... 4
6. MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS......................................... 5
7. PROCEDURE. ................................................................................................... 6
8. HARDNESS TEST PROCEDURE..................................................................... 9
9. PWHT OF REPAIRS........................................................................................ 12
10. RECORDS....................................................................................................... 12
١٦٠
1. SCOPE
This POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT procedure covers the furnace Post Weld
Heat Treatment And Hardness Test Procedure for TK3001 erected in the Field.
Development --------------------------- Project.
2. DEFINITIONS
In case of conflict between this procedure and any project specifications,
datasheets, referenced Standards and codes, it shall be drawn immediately to
attention of Employer (COMPANY) in Writing for approval before
commencement of work.
MAY: In a provision allows the use of optional procedure of practices that can be
used as an Alternative with COMPANY agreement.
SHUOLD: Indicates that among several possibilities, one is recommended as

practically Suitable, without mentioning or excluding others, or that a certain
course of action is preferred but not necessarily required. Other possibilities may
be applied subject to COMPANY Approval.
SHALL / to be: Indicates requirements strictly to be followed in order to conform

to this Specification and from which no deviation is permitted.
VENDOR: ---------------------------------------.
CONTRACTOR: -------------------------------.
EMPLOYER: -----------------------------------.
3. REFERENCES
3.1. API 650-2020
3.2. NACE SP0472
3.3. Project MR
4. SCHEDULING OF PWHT
PWHT shall be performed after following actions:
- Machining
- Cold forming
- All repair and welding
- Final dimensional check
Note: Post weld heat treatment shall be done before the hydrostatic test and after
welded Repairs.
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
161
5.1. This procedure shall be used whenever Post Weld Heat Treatment is required
by the API 650, NACE SP0472 or by the welding procedure specification and tank
data sheet as per Table 1.
5.2. This procedure is a general guideline and should be adjusted by the

specification of each storage tank.
Table 1 Road Map for PWHT of Storage Tanks

Tank Material Service Heating Cooling Holding Holding Location
No. Rate Rate Temp. Time
001 220ºC/Max 280ºC/Max 600 ºC ~ 1Hr per Area 2
t in Inches t in Inches 650 ºC 1 Inches
Note-1: if the thickness is smaller than 1 inch, minimum one hour holding time is
required.
5.3. Welding variables (including essential variables when thermal stress relief are
required by API-650), as defined by QW-250 of Section IX of the ASME Code,
shall be used to determine the welding procedure specifications and the procedure
qualification records to be instituted. Whenever stress relief or thermal stress relief
is used in this standard (API-650) and procedure, it shall mean post-weld heat
treatment.
5.4. All heat treatment activities shall be performed by qualified group and all
relevant equipment must be calibrated and certified by authorized agency before
job commencement.
5.5. Prior to PWHT, the surface of the material to be heat treated shall be checked
that there are no abrasive discontinuities and contaminations, grease, paint, etc., on
the welds
5.6. All machined surfaces and gasket contact surfaces shall be protected from
scaling during PWHT using a suitable protective coating (Like paint or cast
refractory materials).
6. MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS

6.1. Furnace used for PWHT shall have sufficient size of space to get uniformity
of temperature on the heat treated materials or the tank itself may be used as a
furnace using suitable heating source.
6.2. PWHT shall be performed using tank as a furnace in accordance with

following sketch:
١٦٢
6.2.1. Insulation Material & Work the main insulation is ceramic fiber blanket
with thermal heat resistance up to 1250 °C with the thickness of 50 mm and
density of 128 kg/m3. The insulating material shall be kept contact with the shell.
6.2.2. Temperature Measurement and Recording thermocouple used for measuring

temperature shall be type “K” (Chemical alumel) or type joint “J” (Iron – Constantan)
or other type thermocouples approved by owner. Thermocouples shall be attached
on tank shell using spark machine. The external surface of the tank shall be
covered by ceramic fiber blanket, after the thermocouples attached to the external
tank surface. The positive end of the thermocouple shall be connected to the
copper wire of the compensating lead and the negative pole shall be connected to
Constantine wire.
7. PROCEDURE
The tank shall be heated from shell manhole using direct heating method by
means of suitable burner. Adequate measures shall be taken to avoid direct
impingement of flame on to the shell and any local overheating. Adequate
indicating and recording temperature devices is required to aid in the control and
maintenance of a uniform distribution of temperature in the tank wall. Previous to
this operation, the tank should be fully enclosed with insulating material, or the
permanent insulation May be installed provided it is suitable for the required
temperature. The hot fumes inside the tank shall be oriented by means of fans
163
located on roof manhole or other adequate means in such a way as to ensure

temperature uniformity as necessary.
7.1. In order to compensate radial expansion, make sure anchor chairs are not
welded and a suitable clearance is placed between anchor bolts and anchor chairs.
(Anchor chairs hole should at least 1.5 times anchor bolts diameter).
7.2. Thermocouples shall be used according to sketch of location thermocouples

(see Fig .2), attached to the thickest and thinnest sections, at top of the pressure
boundary. All thermocouples attachments shall be adequately insulated to avoid
temperature miss reading caused by effect of radiation.
7.3. Heat treating equipment and recorders shall be calibrated every three months.
7.4. Direct flame contact to the pieces during the heat treatment is absolutely
forbidden.
Fig.2 - Thermocouple Location

(Max. distance between thermocouples shall be 4.6m)
7.5. Heating
7.5.1. Above 425 °C the rate of heating shall be not more than (220 °C/hr.) divided
by the maximum thickness of the plate in inches, but in no case more than (220
°C/hr) and not less than (56 °C/hr.).
١٦٤
7.5.2. During the heating period there shall not be a greater variation in
temperature throughout the portion of vessel being heated than 140 °C with in any
4.6m interval of length.
7.5.3. During the heating period, the atmosphere inside the tank shall be so
controlled as to avoid excessive oxidation of the internal surfaces. All
temperatures within the heated zone shall exceed the specified minimum holding
temperature.
7.6. Holding
7.6.1. The heat treated material shall be held at temperature for the period of time
specified in the Table 1.
7.6.2. During the holding period there shall not be a greater difference than 83 °C
between the highest and lowest temperature throughout the portion of the
materials being heated.
7.6.3. During the holding period, the atmosphere inside the tank shall be so
controlled as to avoid excessive oxidation of the internal surfaces.
7.7. Cooling
7.7.1. Above 425 °C, cooling shall be done at a rate not greater than. 280 °C/hr
divided by the maximum metal thickness of the shell or head plate in inches, but in
no case more than 280 °C/hr and not less than 56 °C/hr.
7.7.2. From 425 °C the parts may be cooled in still air.
7.8. Control of Temperature

Control of temperature during heat treatment will be performed by one or more of
the following methods:
165
7.8.1. Using more thick insulation in locations far from burner

7.8.2. Changing the direction or angle of the burner
7.8.3. Closing opening the nozzles in the vicinity of area whose temperature shall
be raised lowered
7.8.4. Changing air/fuel proportion of burner
7.9. Disassembly
After finishing the PWHT, the crane should lift the tank and all insulation
materials thermocouples and temporary attachments shall be removed and the
attachment ground to clean, smooth contour. The grinded areas shall be subjected
to MT/PT after putting back the tank on its place, anchor chairs should be welded.
7.10. Control of Distortion

Control of tank distortion during PWHT shall be performed using mobile crane ac
cording to Fig.3. in the tank before PWHT starting, the crane should lift the tank
and attachment of the bottom thermocouple and the insulation of bottom of the
tank should be carried out the should be put in its place and attachment of other
thermocouples and the insulation of body and top of the tank should be performed.
During the holding time, 1/3 of the weight of the tank should be lifted by the crane
to prevent distortion of the tank.
8. HARDNESSTESTPROCEDURE
This procedure describes the method & the technique which are to be used for
execution Brinell hardness test on weld during production according to the ASTM
E10 & NACE SP0472 on the storage tanks which fabricated at site.
8.1. Examination:
8.1 .1. Testing Machine: Portable equipment shall be used for hardness testing.
(Device and model number will be specified in report). Equipment for Brinell
hardness testing usually consists of a testing machine which supports the test
specimen and applies an indenting force to a ball in contact with the specimen.
The design of testing machine shall insure that the force the indenter (Brinell ball)
shall be applied smoothly and without impact force. To calibrate the testing
machine see manual manufacture is instruction test machine and ASTM E10.
١٦٦
8.1 .2. Brinell ball (Indenter) the ball shall be polished and free of surface defect.
A hardened steel ball or tungsten carbide ball may be used for materials for a
Brinell hardness not exceeding 450 HB. To get information about ball sizes and
tolerances see table 4 of ASTM E10. The angle between the ball force line and the
surface of the specimen shall be 90 ±2°.
8.1 .3. Test Specimen the thickness of the specimen shall be such that no bulge or
marking showing the effect of the test force appears on the side of the piece
opposite the indention. Minimum thickness requirement for hardness test is given
in table 5 of ASTM E10. The surface on which the indentation is to be made, shall
be filed , ground, machined or polished with abrasive material so that the edge of
the indentation shall be clearly defined to permit measurement. Care should be
taken to avoid overheating or cold working the surface.
8.1.4. Test Force typically standard test force for an intender of 10 mm diameter is
29.42 and 14.7 KN. For another ball diameter see table 3 of ASTM E 10 time
duration for applying full test force is 10 s to 15 s.
8.2. Evaluation of Indentation
167
8.2.1. When indentation is made on a curved surface, the minimum radius of

curvature of the surface shall not be less than 2% times the diameter of the ball.
The measurement of the indentation shall be taken as the mean of the major and
minor axes ("d" in Fig.4) . A number which is proportional to the quotient,
obtained by dividing the test force by the curved area of the indention which is
assumed to be spherical.
Fig.4 - Indentation in hardness test
8.2.2. The values which are calculated according to the equation by considering
different values of the "d" and ball diameter are given in table 2 of ASTM E10.
8.3. Examination
8.3.1. The Brinell hardness test shall be performed when applicable after PWHT
on the weld.
8.3.2. The position subject of examination shall be prepared through smooth

grinding area with dimension min. 30 × 30 mm including center of weld and heat
affected zone.
8.3.3. Weld deposits shall be hardness tested, where required, on the side
contacted by the process whenever possible. If access to the process side is
impractical, such as on small diameter nozzles, hardness testing shall be done on
the opposite side.
8.3.4. For storage tank butt welds where hardness testing is required, a minimum
of one hardness test should be made for each 3m of weld seam. In addition, one
hardness test shall be made on each nozzle flange-to-neck and nozzle neck-to
shell/roof weld. Each unique welding procedure used shall be hardness tested.
8.3.5. The measured values of hardness shall not exceed 200 HB.
١٦٨
9. PWHT OF REPAIRS
When PWHT is required according to service requirements, tank been post weld
heat treated, shall again be post weld heat treated or parts of tank that have dafter
welded repairs have been made.
10. RECORDS
10.1. The records of HEAT TREATMENT shall include the follows:

10.1.1 Equipment name / number
10.1.2 Thermocouple identification, number and locations
10.1.3 Maximum loading and unloading temperature
10.1.4 Recorder number
10.1.5 Heating rate: This shall be recorded & documented on the PWHT chart.
10.1.6 Holding temperature and time: This shall be recorded & documented on the
PWHT Chart.
10.1.7 Cooling rate: This shall be recorded & documented on the PWHT chart.
10.1.8 Equipment calibration check of records.
10.2. The records of HEAT TREATMENT shall be identified with the followings:
10.2.1 Work No.
10.2.2 Applicable Procedure and Revision.
10.2.3 Identification No. of Material parts.
10.2.4 Main Material
10.2.5 Maximum thickness
10.3. Both the strip chart(s) recorded by the recorder(s) and the manual record
along with a PWHT report will be submitted to the owner. The records of PWHT
shall be reviewed and approved by Section Manager in charge of PWHT and shall
be sent to QC for review.
10.4. Hardness Testing Results
169
‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎرم‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﺪاﻳﺘﮕﺮان ﺟﻬﺎن‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮات ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ادﻋﺎ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي‬
‫اﺟﺮاﻳﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺎل ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻛﺸﻮر ﻣﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﺪاﻳﺘﮕﺮان ﺟﻬﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه اش ﭼﻪ در اﻳﺮان و ﭼﻪ در ﺧﺎرج از اﻳﺮان ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﭘﻲ ﺑﺮد ﻛﻪ‬
‫دﻗﺖ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ در اراﺋﻪ ﻣﺪارك ﻗﻮي دال ﺑﺮ ﻧﻈﺎرت و اﺷﺮاف ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ آﻧﻬﻢ ﺑﺼﻮرت‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﻣﺪون ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﺪاﻳﺘﮕﺮان ﺟﻬﺎن ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺮوﮔﺎﻫﻲ و ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻔﺖ و ﮔﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﺪاﻳﺘﮕﺮان ﺟﻬﺎن آﻣﺎده‬
‫ﻫﻤﻜﺎري در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎوره و اﺟﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ و در ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش در واﻗﻊ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﻬﻢ و ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﻛﺸﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش ﺑﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻨﻲ و ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ و‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮوﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﺒﺤﺮ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ در ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺸﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ از ﻧﻮع اﺣﺘﺮاﻗﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ذوب ﻓﻠﺰات‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺎب روي ﻓﻠﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎ در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ و ﮔﺎز‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎز ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫*‪ -‬اراﺋﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻮرژﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري ﺗﻨﺶ ﻛﺎر اُﻛﺴﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮي ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪ PWHT‬ﺳﺮ ﺟﻮش ﺧﻄﻮط ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم و ﭘﺴﮕﺮم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري –‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن – اﺟﺮاي ‪ NDT‬ﺟﻮش – ﺗﻬﻴﻪ و ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺎن ﺟﻨﻮب‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮي و ﻣﺸﺎور ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﺋﻲ و رادﻳﻮﮔﺮاﻓﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎدري ﻣﺠﺮب و ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ در ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ داﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺛﺒﺖ دﻣﺎ و داﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺮاﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎي اﻳﺰوﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺻﺪ در ﺻﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ و ﻛﺎري‪ ،‬آﻣﺎده ﻫﻤﻜﺎري در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ و ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ و در ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (Stationary Furnace‬دارﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺴﺎز در اﻫﻮاز‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺎﺷﺎ در اﻫﻮاز‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي اراك‬
‫‪ -4‬ﮔﺮوه ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ اﻧﺼﺎر‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻫﺪاﻳﺘﮕﺮان ﺟﻬﺎن‬-1
171
١٧٢
173
١٧٤
175
١٧٦
177
١٧٨
179
١٨٠
181
١٨٢
183
١٨٤
185
١٨٦
187
١٨٨
189
١٩٠
191
١٩٢
193
‫■‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اول از ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﺮوي در اﺑﻮﻏﺮﻳﺐ ﻋﺮاق‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫*‪ -‬در ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ‪600 ºC‬‬
‫‪195‬‬
١٩٦
197
١٩٨
‫*‪ -‬در ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪي ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ‪ 600 ºC‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪199‬‬
٢٠٠
201
‫*‪ -‬در ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪي ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ و ﻓﺮآﻳﻨﺪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻣﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي ‪ 600‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬و اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ اﺧﺘﻼف دﻣﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ در‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﺨﺰن و ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﺮوي‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
203
٢٠٤
205
٢٠٦
207
٢٠٨
209
٢١٠
:‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش‬-2
Artash Engineering Company was founded by its present members in 1984. Their
comprehensive professional experience, coupled with new ideas and the will to put
them into practice, laid the foundations of the Company as we know it today.
In the early years we concentrated our activities on engineering, design,
construction, and service of oil and gas heated furnaces, plus the relevant
combustion systems. Later on we added design and fabrication of pressure vessel,
subsequently followed by design and manufacture of heat treatment burners and
control modules for P.W.H.T to our repertoire.
(‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش )ﺳﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎص‬

‫ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺳﻮز ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺺ‬-‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﻮره در اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ از ﻧﻮع ﮔﺎزﺳﻮز‬-1
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻓﻠﺰي‬
‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ و ذﺧﻴﺮه ﮔﺎز و ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻔﺖ و ﮔﺎز و ﭘﺘﺮوﺷﻴﻤﻲ‬-2
‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﻠﺰات و ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ از ﺳﺎزهﻫﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺎزن و ﻏﻴﺮه‬-3
211
In every industry in which liquids or gases are processed or stored under pressure, there
is a need for pressure vessels with high quality & reliability.
Artash Eng. Co. designs and fabricates various types and sizes of pressure vessels,
according to internationally accepted rules, such as ASME, ANSI, API, etc. These
vessles have wide range of applications. We have a production line for fabrication of
L.P.G. storage and transport tanks .
‫در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎ در ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن‬
.‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش داراي ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ و ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر و ﻇﺮوف‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬.‫ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ از وزارت ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ و ﻏﻴﺮه ﺑﺮاي ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‬API ‫ ﻳﺎ‬ANSI, ASME ‫ﻣﻘﺮرات و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻔﺖ و ﮔﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
٢١٢
Artash Engineering Co. with nearly quarter of a century experience in PWHT

pioneered in Iran the high velocity burner system for the heat treatment of large
vessels and spheres, or any large metal fabrications, which can not be readily or
easily accommodated in a standard furnace. Artash Engineering Co. produces a
standard range of semi or fully automatic, program controlled, preheating and
heat treatment units, plus extremely robust and stable multipurpose heating
elements and mats.
،‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش ﭘﻴﺸﺮو در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬
.‫ﭘﺲ از ﺣﺪود ﻳﻚ رﺑﻊ ﻗﺮن ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ در اﻳﻦ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮده و ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ در ﻛﺸﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻣﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري از ﻣﺨﺎزن و ﺳﺎزه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ را ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮده اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻃﻴﻒ ﮔﺴﺘﺮده اي از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ و ﻟﻮازم ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ ﮔﻴﺮي و ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم از ﻧﻮع اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
.‫ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ و اﻟﻤﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮﻗﻲ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
Artash Engineering Co. offers a wide range of furnaces, especially in:
Heat Treatment and Forging Shops.
Remelting plants for Copper, Aluminum, Lead and Galvanizing.
Enamel shops with batch or continuous radiant tube one shift operation
Special purpose furnaces.
213
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ آرﺗﺎش ﻃﺮاح و ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه اﻧﻮاع ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﺖ ﻛﺎري‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﮔﻴﺮي‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻻﻳﺰﻳﻨﮓ‪ ،‬آﻧﻴﻠﻴﻨﮓ‪ ،‬اﺳﻔﺮوداﻳﺰﻳﻨﮓ‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم از ﻧﻮع واﮔﻨﻲ و ﮔﺎم ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎم )واﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﻴﻢ( ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻮرد و آﻫﻨﮕﺮي‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ذوب ﻓﻠﺰات رﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺲ‪ ،‬آﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮم‪ ،‬ﺳﺮب‪ ،‬روي‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﭘﺨﺖ ﻟﻌﺎب ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﻲ ﻣﺪاوم ﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اي‪.‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‬
‫‪At Artash Co. We're more than manufacture’s ••• we're problem solving‬‬
‫‪professional who take the time to understand your needs.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ در ﺷﺮﻛﺖ آرﺗﺎش ﻣﺎ ﻓﺮاﺗﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻛﻮره‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ درك ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﮔﺮه ﮔﺸﺎي ﺻﻨﻌﺘﮕﺮان‬
‫در اﻳﻦ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ دارﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٤‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻛﺎر اُﻛﺴﻴﻦ‬:‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎري‬-3
215
٢١٦
217
٢١٨
219
٢٢٠
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺎن ﺟﻨﻮب‬-4

‫)ﻣﺠﺮي و ﻣﺸﺎور ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﺋﻲ( و رادﻳﻮﮔﺮاﻓﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎدري ﻣﺠﺮب و ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ اﺟﺮاﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ در ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ داﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺛﺒﺖ دﻣﺎ و داﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺮاﻧﺲ‬
‫ آﻣﺎده ﻫﻤﻜﺎري در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ و ﺗﻨﺶ‬،‫ﻫﺎي اﻳﺰوﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺻﺪ در ﺻﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ و ﻛﺎري‬
.‫زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ و در ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫داراي داﻧﺶ روز در‬
‫ آﻟﻤﺎن و اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ در ﺑﻜﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي‬،‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻦ آوري دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژي اﺑﺰار دﻗﻴﻖ ژاﭘﻦ‬-●
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﺛﺒﺎت و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮارت‬
‫ ﺑﺎ‬18 ‫ و‬17 ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺎن ﺟﻨﻮب اﻓﺘﺨﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﺴﺘﻪ در اداﻣﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﻓﺎزﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻟﺬا آﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ﺧﻮد را‬.‫ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ و راه اﻧﺪازي ﻛﻮره ﻋﻼده ﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮدد‬
.‫ در ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻋﻼم ﻣﻲ دارد‬PWHT ‫ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
Tanesh Yaban Jonoub co. Ltd

Electrical PWHT equipment and consumables
Some ofthe Electrical PWHT equipment. accessories, materials and consumables
available in Tanesh Yaban Jonoub co. Ltd are as follows,
- PWHT Control Units, made by TYG itself.
- Type "K" Temperature Recorder 0 – 1200 deg. C.6 Point &12 Point Type
- ThermocoupleAttachment Unit
- Type "K" Thermocouple Wire 0.711 / 0.8 mm Dia. × 100 Metres / Roll c/w
Inspection Certificate
- High Temperature Ceramic Putty (Thermocouple Putty),0.5 kgs / Tub
- Flexible Ceramic Pad Heaters, various Sizes
- Finger Element Heaters, various Sizes
- Ni-Cr Core Wire and Nickel Cold Tail Wire
- Ceramic Beads, Various Types
- Ceramic Fiber Blanket and Rock Wool Insulation,
PWHT Services:
■- On site electrical/ gas fired PWHT (Post Weld Heat Treatment) work of Piping
welds, pressure vessels, spherical tanks, heat exchangers, boilers, structural steels
& etc for Oil & gas industry, power plants, petrochemicals, steel mills, ship
buildings and other heavy industries.
●- Preheat during welding of tubes and subsequent pre-weld heat treating of
repairs.
●- Post Weld Heat Treat of entire pressure vessel using high velocity fuel fire
burners and electric resistance booster heater.
●- Installing Temporary Site Furnace for Post Weld Heat Treatment.
221
٢٢٢
‫*‪ -‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﭘﺮوژه ﻫﺎي اﺟﺮاﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺎن ﺟﻨﻮب‬
‫‪223‬‬
‫*‪ -‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﺮم ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺎن ﺟﻨﻮب‬

‫آﻗﺎي ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﻫﻮﺷﻨﮓ ﻗﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس ‪09171126029‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮره ﻫﺎي ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (Stationary Furnace‬دارﻧﺪ‬

‫●‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺴﺎز در اﻫﻮاز‬
‫آدرس‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮ ‪ 7‬ﺟﺎده اﻫﻮاز – ﺧﺮﻣﺸﻬﺮ – روﺑﺮوي ﻣﻼﺷﻴﻪ‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺴﺎز‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪06133313100-4 :‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬اﺑﻌﺎد ﻛﻮره‪ :‬ﻃﻮل × ﻋﺮض × ارﺗﻔﺎع ‪ 30‬ﻣﺘﺮ × ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ × ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪225‬‬
٢٢٦
‫●‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺎﺷﺎ در اﻫﻮاز‬
‫آدرس‪ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺟﺎده اﻫﻮاز – ﻣﺎﻫﺸﻬﺮ – ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺗﭙﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺮوﻣﻲ‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﺣﻔﺎري ﺷﻤﺎل‪ -‬روﺑﺮوي اﺳﻘﺎط‬
‫ﺧﻮدرو‪-‬روﺑﺮوي ﺷﻬﺮك ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ‪ -4‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي ﺗﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪06132289202 :‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬اﺑﻌﺎد ﻛﻮره‪ :‬ﻃﻮل × ﻋﺮض × ارﺗﻔﺎع ‪ 30‬ﻣﺘﺮ × ‪ 7‬ﻣﺘﺮ × ‪ 7‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪227‬‬
‫●‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎزي اراك‬

‫دﻓﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺮان‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻜﻪ دوم ﺻﺎدﻗﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰرﮔﺮاه اﺷﺮﻓﻲ اﺻﻔﻬﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎره ‪ ،119‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪ اول‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ -02144248214 :‬ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‪09912054903 :‬‬
‫‪heat@mfs-co.com‬‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬‬
‫اﺗﻮﺑﺎن ﺗﻬﺮان‪-‬ﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻬﺮك ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺷﻤﺲ آﺑﺎد‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﻠﻮار ﺑﻬﺎرﺳﺘﺎن‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻮار آزادي‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺶ ﻧﺮﮔﺲ ﺷﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪02144222415 :‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻛﻮره ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫اﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ‪ 20×9×9‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ وزﻧﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 200‬ﺗﻦ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ در ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﻣﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ‪ 1200‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮاد‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ‪ 12000000‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻛﺎﻟﺮي در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻤﺎم اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ‪ LPG‬و ﮔﺎز ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻮره از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ واﮔﻦ روي رﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺑﺎ ﭘﺘﻮي ﺳﺮاﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪٢٢٨‬‬
229
‫●‪ -‬ﮔﺮوه ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ اﻧﺼﺎر‬
‫آدرس دﻓﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‪ :‬اﺻﻔﻬﺎن‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﺧﺮم‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ راه ﺻﻤﺪﻳﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪(031)33363399 - 33390000 :‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره واﺗﺲ اپ‪0935 888 9000 .‬‬
‫دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﺮان‪:‬ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻃﺎﻟﻘﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭼﻬﺎر راه ﻣﻔﺘﺢ اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻣﻠﻚ اﻟﺸﻌﺮاي ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ اﻳﺮان ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬واﺣﺪ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ (021) 88812582-3 :‬و ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ‪(021) 88342062‬‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪:‬ﺷﻬﺮك ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻧﺠﻒ آﺑﺎد ‪ ، 2‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ و ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﮔﺮوه ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ اﻧﺼﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل ‪ ،13‬ﻋﺮض ‪ 6‬و ارﺗﻔﺎع ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺗﺎ ‪ 1100‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‪ ،‬آﻧﻴﻠﻴﻨﮓ و ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰه ﻛﺮدن را ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪ PLC‬دﻣﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻛﻮره ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ و ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ‪ 1‬درﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﺪه و ﻧﻤﻮدار ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات دﻣﺎﻳﻲ در واﺣﺪ زﻣﺎن ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در دﻣﺎي‬
‫‪ 600±20‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در دﻳﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺨﺎر و آﺑﮕﺮم ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺷﺪن ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﺳﻜﻮﭘﻲ‬
‫و از ﺑﻴﻦ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺴﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺧﻤﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮش و ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
231
‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬:‫ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬-5

1- API 650-2020: Welded Tanks for Oil Storage
2- API 620-2018- Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-pressure
Storage Tanks
3- API 945- Avoiding Environmental Cracking in Amine Units Second Edition
4- NACE SP0403 (RP0403) Avoiding Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking of
Carbon Steel Refinery Equipment and Piping
5- NACE SP0472 (RP0472) Methods and Controls to Prevent In-Service
Environmental Cracking of Carbon Steel Weldments in Corrosive Petroleum
Refining Environments
6- GB 50094-98- Code for construction and Acceptance of spherical tanks
7- ENI Specification (PWHT Procedure Eni Company)
8- NORSOK standard L-004
9- www.Rs- Components.Com (Thermocouple Selection Guide)
10- www.voestalpine.com/grobblech (TMCP-steels for offshore applications)
11- Site Preparation
12- www.thermoprozess.de (Company profile)
13- RHYAL ENGINEERING (LAGUNA-LBNO General Meeting Experience in
Tank Building)
14- Internet: https://www.markazeahan.com/what-is-anchor-bolt
15- Internet: THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
(https://www.engr.psu.edu/ce/courses/ce584/concrete/library/cracking.htm)
16- Internet: http://behinenergyco.ir
17- Internet: https://mag.damapouya.com/guide-to-calculate-and-select-burner
18- Internet: http://tarazenergy.com
19- Internet: https://www.bamintahvie.com/article
20- Internet: https://heatmfs.com/services#1614714846963-dfbb3740-28b7
21- Internet: http://www.mfs-co.com/
22- Internet: http://www.kumga.co.kr/heat_e.html
23- Internet: http://www.paysaz.com
24- Internet: http://www.Ansar.Co.ir
25- https://tasha-co.com
25- METHODS OF WELDING FLANGES TO PIPE
26- PIP STE03020 Guidelines for Tank Foundation Designs
27- Post Weld Heat Treatment Equipment & Consumables
28- THIN WALL STORAGE TANKS
29- AWS D10.10/D10.10M:1999 (R2009) - Recommended Practices for Local
Heating of Welds in Piping and Tubing
30- Interpretation (Inquiry: 650-I-16/03) API-650
31- PWHT-induction booklet
32- API RP 582-2016- Recommended Practice for Welding Guidelines ….
33- ASTM E10-08
34- Various Project Procedures
٢٣٢

Thermal Stress Relief in Storage Tank (API-650)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Thermal Stress Relief in Storage Tank (API-650)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Thermal Stress Relief in Storage Tank API-650

‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪١٠٧................................................................ COOLING RATE‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎرم‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪170 ......................................................................‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪232 .............................................................................................................‬‬

‫»ﺻﻠﻮات ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ و آل ﻣﺤﻤﺪ« ﺳﺮّ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮي ﻧﻮر‬

‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺑﻪ ﺻﺮاﺣﺖ در اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API 620‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.25.2‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 6.19‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زدن )ﺑﺎ ﭼﻜﺶ( روي ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (Thermal Stress Relief) : (5.7.4.1‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬

Flush-type Cleanout Fittings ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ از‬-*

‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از رﺑﺎت ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺨﺰن‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.2‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻬﻮﻟﻬﺎ و ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻧﻮع ‪ flush-type‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬وﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.3‬ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﻬﻮﻟﻬﺎ و ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻧﻮع ‪ flush-type‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬وﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل‬

‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اي از ‪Thickened insert plate‬‬

‫)ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎي ‪ V, IVA, IV‬و ‪ VI‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪول ‪( Table 4.4b‬‬

‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ‪Table 4.4b‬‬

‫‪ -1,5‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.4‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ Flush-type‬ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ -1,6‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.5‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻧﺎزﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮاد ﻛﻮﺋﻴﻨﭻ و ﺗﻤﭙﺮ ‪...‬‬

‫‪ -1,8‬ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ : (5.7.4.7 & 5.7.4.8‬آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎت و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻣﺎي ‪PWHT‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺳﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل در ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪول ﻓﻮق‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﺮ ﻓﻮق در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي )‪: TMCP (Thermo-Mechanical-Control-Process‬‬

‫■ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻻدﻫﺎي‪TMCP‬‬

‫■‪ -‬ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ در اﺟﺮاء‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي دﻳﻮاره ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.8.11.3‬از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪:API 650-2020‬‬

‫*‪ -‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺘﻦ )‪ (Concrete‬ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫*‪ -‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎك )‪ (Soil‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫*‪ -‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎزﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﺧﺎك ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2,6‬روش اول "ب"‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﺪا از ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪ -2,7‬روش دوم‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫در ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ 5.12‬از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ API-650-2020‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Anchor-Bolt‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ آﻣﺪه‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ‪ Anchor-Bolt‬در ﻣﺨﺎزن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ از دو زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫‪ -2,10‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )‪ (Anchor Bolts‬در ﻣﺨﺰن ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

In-situ heat treatment of storage tanks presents a number of problems:

6.3.6 Concrete at High Temperatures

‫‪ -2,11‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ دوم؛ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ‬

‫‪ -2,12‬اﺟﺮاي ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪاﺳﻴﻮن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﻳﻲ از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﺳﻮز‬

‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫■‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮل دوم ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ‬

‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ‬

‫)*(‪ -‬ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ از ﺳﺎﻳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‪-‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﺧﺎﻧﻪ )‪(http://tarazenergy.com‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻠﻲ و ﮔﺎزي‪:‬‬

‫‪ -2,13‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن‬

‫‪ -2,16‬ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬

‫‪ -2,17‬ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ درون ﻛﻮره ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Stationary Furnace‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮر ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف )‪ API-650-2020-Para. 5.7.4.6 (c‬دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﻌﻞ ﻫﺎي ™‪ Selas Superflame‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ‪ NOx‬ﻛﻢ‬

‫‪ -2,18‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ‪Temperature Control‬‬

‫‪ -2,20‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ از ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه‬

6.2 Thermocouples shall be attached to the workpiece by the direct wire

‫■‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻮش ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ‬

‫‪ -2,22‬ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز ‪ Putty‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ -2,23‬ﺗﻌﺪاد و ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

T1 Middle of Roof tank

:‫ﻣﺜﺎل دوم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺗﺮﻣﻮﻛﻮﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ در ﻣﺨﺰن ذﺧﻴﺮه اﻳﻲ‬

‫■ – ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪي ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪي ‪Heating Rate‬‬

‫■ ‪ -‬ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﮔﺮاف ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮد‬

‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.11‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﻪ ‪ PWHT‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2,25‬ﻛﻮره ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ )‪(Temporary Furnace‬‬

‫‪ -2,26‬ﺗﻨﺶ زداﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ‪ : 5.3.3‬ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬